THE GIFT OF

FLORENCE V. V. DICKEY

TO THE

UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA
AT LOS ANGELES

THE DONALD R. DICKEY

LIBRARY
OF VERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY

A MANUAL OF STYLE

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
CHICAGO, ILLINOIS

THE BAKER AND TAYLOR COMPANY

KEW YORK

THE CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS

LOSDOH

THE MARUZEN-KABUSHIKI-KAISHA

TOSTO, OSAKA, ETOTO, FUIUOKA, SIVDAI

THE MISSION BOOK COMPANY

SHAK8HAI

A MANUAL OF STYLE

A COMPILATION OF

TYPOGRAPHICAL RULES GOVERNING THE PUBLICATIONS OF

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO, WITH SPECIMENS OF

TYPES USED AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS

SEVENTH EDITION

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
CHICAGO, ILLINOIS

Published November 1906

Second Edition March 1910

Third Edition December 1911

Second Impression August 1912

Fourth Edition February 1914

Fifth Edition November 1917

Sixth Edition October 1919

Seventh Edition November 1920

Second Impression January 1923

Composed and Printed By

The University of Chicago Press

Chicago. Illinois, U.S.A.

SRI*
imc

5137lo

INTRODUCTORY NOTE

The present work is a codification of the typographical
rules employed by the University of Chicago in connection
with its official printing and publications issued through
its University Press. Having its genesis, over two
decades ago, in a single sheet of fundamentals, jotted
down by the first proofreader at odd moments for his
own guidance; added to from year to year, as oppor-
tunity offered or new necessities arose; revised and
re-revised as the scope of the work, and, it is hoped, the
wisdom of the workers, increased it emerges in its present
form as the embodiment of traditions, the crystallization
of usages, the blended product of the reflections of many
minds.

Regulations like these, hi the nature of the case,
cannot be endowed with the fixity of unchanging law.
They are meant for the average case, and must be
applied with a certain degree of elasticity. Exceptions
will constantly occur, and ample room is left for individual
initiative and discretion. They point the way and survey
the road, rather than remove the obstacles. Throughout
this book it is assumed that no regulation contained therein
is absolutely inviolable. Wherever the peculiar nature of
the subject-matter, the desirability of throwing into relief
a certain part of the argument, the reasonable preference

501579 .

vi INTRODUCTORY NOTE

of a writer, or a typographical contingency suggests a
deviation, such deviation may legitimately be made. Each
case of this character must be decided largely upon its
own merits. Generally it may be stated that, where no
question of taste or logic is involved, deference should
be shown to the expressed wishes of the author.

The nature of the work of the Press itself and this
will apply, to a greater or less extent, to any similar in-
stitution affected by local conditions constantly calls for
modification, now of this rule, now of that. It would be
found impracticable, even were it desirable, to bring all
its publications into rigid uniformity of "style" and
appearance. Methods have been devised, systems evolved,
in certain lines of work, which cannot be carried bodily
over into the field of others. Thus, in the matter of literary
references, for instance, general practice has established
certain usages in some of the sciences which it would not
be advisable to ignore. Similar differences in practice
may be observed in other directions. These deviations
from the general rules will be found mentioned at the
appropriate places in the body of the book. On the whole,
however, the rules are designed to govern all publications
sent forth with the official publishing imprint, "The
University of Chicago Press."

Concerning the character and contents of the book
little need be added. Its origin, its primary aim, and its
limitations, as outlined above, will suggest the bounds of
its usefulness. It does not pretend to be exhaustive; a
few things must be taken for granted, and the traditional

INTRODUCTORY NOTE vn

territory of the dictionary has only exceptionally been
invaded. It does not presume to be inflexibly consistent;
applicability, in the printing-office, is a better test than
iron-clad consistency, and common sense a safer guide
than abstract logic. It lays no claim to perfection in any
of its parts; bearing throughout the inevitable earmarks
of compromise, it will not carry conviction at every point
to everybody. Neither is it an advocate of any radical
scheme of reform; in the present state of the agitation
for changes in spelling, progressive conservatism has
been thought to be more appropriate for an academic
printing-office than radicalism. As it stands, this Manual
is believed to contain a fairly comprehensive, reasonably
harmonious, and wholesomely practical set of work-rules
for the aid of those who have to do with questions of
typographical style. For the benefit of those whose duties
bring them into direct contact with the manufacturing
department of the Press, specimen pages of the available
types, special characters, etc., have been added.

The Manual of Style is now in its seventh edition.
That it is recognized as possessing merit is evidenced by
its adoption and use in many editorial offices, libraries,
and proofrooms in the United States and Canada.
This edition incorporates several new rules which it is
believed will prove helpful, and at the same time seeks
to elucidate some of the older rules, in the application
of which difficulties may arise. Changes in literary
practice, the legislation of learned societies, the recent
development of the profession of the librarian, with the

Viii INTRODUCTORY NOTE

attendant uniformity of practice recommended by the
national association of librarians, and the added experi-
ence resulting from a daily application of these rules to
a very varied list of publications, are all factors con-
tributing to the need of periodical revision.

The work, thus remodeled, is again offered to the
public, in the hope that it may continue to be useful
to those whose occupations require some familiarity with
the niceties of typographical form.

THE UNIVERSITY PRESS

CHICAGO, ILL.
November, 1920

CONTENTS

FAGS

RULES FOR COMPOSITION i

Capitalization 3

The Use of Italics 25

Quotations 33

Spelling . . 37

Punctuation 50

Divisions 81

Footnotes 88

Indexing 92

Tabular Work 95

TECHNICAL TERMS 103

APPENDIX 119

Hints to Authors and Editors 121

Hints to Proofreaders 125

Hints to Copyholders 130

Proofreader's Marks 133

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 135

INDEXES 283

Index to Manual 285

Index to Types, etc 299

RULES FOR COMPOSITION

CAPITALIZATION

CAPITALIZE

1. Proper nouns and adjectives:

George, America, North America, Englishman; Elizabethan,
French. (See 53.)

Do not capitalize verbs derived from proper names
and having a specialized meaning:

to boycott, to fletcherize, to pasteurize;

nor such words as the following, when used in

their special scientific or trade significance:

volt, ampere, angstrom, farad, watt, henry, ohm, coulomb.

2. Epithets used as substitutes for proper names, or
affixed to a name:

the Pretender, Bloody Mary, Richard the Lion-hearted,
Alexander the Great.

3. The particles in French names, a: "le," "la," "de,"
"du," when they are not preceded by a Christian
name or title; but do not capitalize them when
they are preceded by such name or title:

Le Bossu, La Torre, La Rochelle, De Coligny, D'Aubigne*,
Du Maurier (but: Rene le Bossu, Miguel de la Torre,
Gaspard de Coligny, Thomas d'Aubigne, George du
Maurier).

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

Capitalize "Van" in Dutch names; do not capi-
talize "von" in German names unless it begins a
sentence:

Stephen Van Rensselaer; Hugo von Martius, von Dobschiitz.

NOTE. Personal preference is responsible for the following ex-
ceptions: Henry van Dyke, J. H. van't Hoff, A. van Maanen.

4. Generic terms forming a part of geographical names:

Atlantic Ocean, Dead Sea, Baffin's Bay, Gulf of Mexico,
Straits of Gibraltar, Straits Settlements, Mississippi River,
Three Rivers, Laughing Brook, Rocky Mountains, Blue
Hills, Pike's Peak, Mount of Olives, Great Desert, Death
Valley, Prince Edward Island, Sea (Lake) of Galilee.

But do not capitalize words of this class when simply
added by way of description to the specific name,
without forming an organic part of such name:

the river Elbe, the desert of Sahara, the island of Madagascar.

Subject to the rule above, the following lists will be
found useful (see 104) :

CAPITALIZE, IN SINGULAR FORM ONLY, WHEN IMMEDIATELY
FOLLOWING NAME

Archipelago
Borough
Branch (stream)
Butte

Fork
Gap
Glacier
Gulch

Park
Plateau
Range
Reservation

Canyon
County
Crater

Harbor
Head
Hollow

Ridge
River
Run

Creek
Delta

Mesa
Ocean

Valley

Forest

Parish (La.)

MANUAL OF STYLE: CAPITALIZATION

CAPITALIZE, IN SINGULAR OR PLURAL FORM, WHEN IMME-
DIATELY FOLLOWING THE NAME

Hill Mountain Spring

Island Narrows

CAPITALIZE, IN SINGULAR FORM, EITHER BEFORE OR AFTER
THE NAME; AND IN PLURAL FORM BEFORE THE NAME

Bay Fort Peak

Bayou Isle Point

Camp (military) Lake Port

Cape Mount Sea

Dalles Oasis Strait

Desert Pass Volcano
Falls

5. Adjectives and nouns used singly or in conjunction,
to distinguish definite regions, and when used in
connection with a recognized geographical term;
and also terms applied to groups of states:

Old World, Western Hemisphere, Continental Europe, the
Continent (to distinguish it from the British Isles), North
Pole, Equator, the North ( = Scandinavia), the East (the
Orient), the Far East, the Levant; the North, South, East,
West, Middle West (United States) ; Northern Europe (but :
southern California); North Atlantic states, Gulf states,
Pacific Coast states.

But do not, as a rule, capitalize adjectives derived
from such names or nouns simply designating
direction or point of compass:

oriental customs, the southern states, the middle western
states, a southerner (but: Northman = Scandinavian) ; an
invasion of barbarians from the north, extending through
the south of Europe.

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

In order that a distinction may be made between
a local and a world-wide application, the latter
should be capitalized:

Eastern peoples (i.e., peoples of the Orient); Western
nations.

6. Generic terms for political divisions:

(1) when the term is an organic part of the name,
following the proper name directly :

Holy Roman Empire, German Empire (=Deutsches Reich),
French Republic (=Republique franfaise), United Kingdom,
Northwest Territory, Cook County, Evanston Township,
Kansas City (New York City exception).

(2) when, with the preposition "of," it is used as
an integral part of the name to indicate certain
minor administrative subdivisions in the United
States:

Department of the Lakes, Town of Lake, Borough of Man-
hattan.

(3) when used singly as the accepted designation
for a specific division:

the Union, the States, the Republic (= United States), [the
Confederacy], the Dominion (= Canada), the West Side.

(4) when it is part of a fanciful or popular appel-
lation used as if a real geographical name :

Celestial Empire, Holy (Promised) Land, Badger State,
Eternal City, Garden City.

MANUAL OF STYLE: CAPITALIZATION 7

But do not (with the exceptions noted) capitalize such
terms when standing alone, or when, with "of,"
preceding the specific name:

the empire, the state; empire of Russia, kingdom of Servia,
duchy of Anhalt, state of Illinois, county of Cook, city of
Chicago; but: the Empire (meaning the Roman Empire).

7. Numbered political divisions (see 100) :

Eleventh Congressional District, First Ward, Second Precinct.

8. The names of thoroughfares, parks, squares, blocks,
buildings, etc. (see 100) :

Drexel Avenue, Rings trasse, Via Appia, Chicago Drainage
Canal; Lincoln Park; Trafalgar Square; Monadnock
Block; Lakeside Building, Capitol, White House, County
Hospital, Theatre Francais, Lexington Hotel, Masonic
Temple [Solomon's temple, but, when standing alone: the
Temple].

But do not capitalize such general designations of
buildings as "courthouse," "post-office," "library,"
etc., except in connection with the name of the place
in which they are located, when they thus form a
proper name.

9. The names of political parties, religious denomina-
tions or sects, and philosophical, literary, and artistic
schools, and their adherents:

Republican, Conservative, National Liberal, Social Democ-
racy (where, as in Continental Europe, it is organized as
a distinct parliamentary faction); Christian, Protestantism

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

Evangelical Lutheran, Catholic, Reformed, Greek Orthodox,
Anabaptist, Seventh-Day Adventists, the Establishment,
High Church, High Churchman, Separatist, Nonconform-
ist, Dissenter, Papist, Ultramontane, Theosophist, Jew,
Gentile as a noun, Pharisee (but: scribe) (adjective:
Pharisaic, but : pharisaic, when used of characteristics, and
not of the sect itself); Epicurean, Stoic, Gnosticism (but:
neo-Platonism, pseudo-Christianity, un-Christian see 203,
208), Literalist; the Romantic movement, the Symbolic
school of painters.

But do not capitalize any of the foregoing or similar
words, or their derivatives, when used in their origi-
nal or acquired general sense of pervading spirit,
point of view, trend of thought, attitude of mind, or
mode of action:

republican form of government, a true democrat and a con-
servative statesman, socialism as an economic panacea, the
communistic theory, single-taxer, anarchism; catholicity of
mind, puritanical ideas, evangelical spirit, pharisaic super-
ciliousness; deist, pantheism, rationalist; epicurean tastes,
stoic endurance, dualism and monism in present-day philoso-
phy, an altruistic world-view; the classics, a nemesis.

10. The names of monastic orders and their members:
Black Friars, Dominican, Jesuit.

11. The proper (official) titles of social, religious, educa-
tional, political, commercial, and industrial organiza-
tions and institutions:

Union League Club, Knights Templar; Young People's
Society of Christian Endeavor, Associated Charities; Smith-
sonian Institution, State University of Iowa, Hyde Park High

MANUAL OF STYLE: CAPITALIZATION 9

School; the Commercial Academy (Handelsakademie) of
Leipzig, the Paris Lyceum (Lycee de Paris); the Forty
[Immortals]; Cook County Democracy, Tammany Hall;
Associated Press, Typographical Union No. 16; Chicago,
Milwaukee & St. Paul Railroad, The Macmillan Company.

But do not capitalize such generic terms when used
to designate a class; nor when standing alone, even
if applied to a specific institution, except to avoid
ambiguity or, rarely, where the word is consistently
and clearly used in place of the true name :

young people's societies, the high school at Lemont, local
typographical unions; the club, the association, the company;
but: "He joined the Hall [Tammany]," "a member of the
[French] Academy." (See 49.)

12. The names of legislative, judiciary, and administra-
tive bodies and governmental departments, and their
branches, when specifically applied:

Congress (Senate, House of Representatives [the House],
Committee of Ways and Means), Parliament (House of
Lords, House of Commons), Reichstag, Chamber of Deputies
(the Chamber), General Assembly of Illinois, Chicago City
Council, South Park Commissioners; Supreme Court of the
United States, Circuit Court of Cook County, [Sanhedrin];
Department of the Interior, Census Office, Springfield Board
of Education, Department of Public Works, the United
States Army (but : he has served in the army; an army man).

But do not capitalize such general, paraphrastic, or
incomplete designations as

the national assembly, the legislature of the state, the upper
house of Congress, the Dutch diet; the council, the depart-
ment, the board.

10 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

13. Ordinals used to designate Egyptian dynasties,
sessions of Congress, names of regiments, and in
similar connections (see 100) :

the Eighteenth Dynasty (but: the Ming dynasty), the
Fifty-third Congress, the Second Illinois Regiment Band.

14. Commonly accepted appellations for historical
epochs, periods in the history of a language or
literature, and geological ages and strata, the word
"age" itself being capitalized only where a failure
to do so would result in ambiguous meaning:

Neolithic age (but: Stone Age, Middle Ages), Crusades,
Renaissance, Reformation, Inquisition, Commonwealth
(Cromwell's), Commune (Paris); Old English (OE see
123), Middle High German (MHG), the Age of Elizabeth;
Pleistocene, Silurian, Lower Carboniferous, Christian Era.

But do not capitalize informal adjectives in such
phrases as

early Algonkian, late Permian.

15. Names of important events:

Thirty Years' War, Peasants' War (German), Revolution
(French), Revolutionary War or War of Independence
(American), Whiskey Insurrection (American), Civil War
(American), War of 1812, Franco-Prussian War, Battle of
Gettysburg; Peace of Utrecht, Louisiana Purchase.

16. Political alliances, and such terms from secular or
ecclesiastical history as have, through their associa-

MANUAL OF STYLE: CAPITALIZATION II

tions, acquired special significance as designations
for parties, classes, movements, etc. (see 9) :

Protestant League, Holy Alliance, Dreibund; the Roses, the
Roundheads, Independents, Independency (English history),
Nonconformist, Dissenter, Separatist.

17. Conventions, congresses, expositions,etc. :

Council of Nicaea, Parliament of Religions, Fifteenth Inter-
national Congress of Criminology, Westminster Assembly,
Chicago World's Fair, Louisiana Purchase Exposition.

18. Titles of specific treaties, acts, laws (juridical),
bills, etc.:

Treaty of Verdun, Art. V of the Peace of Prague, Edict of
Nantes, Concordat, the Constitution (of the United States,
when standing alone, or when referred to as a literary docu-
ment; but not usually that of any other state or country, e.g.,
the constitution of Illinois), Declaration of Independence,
Act of Emancipation, Magna C(h)arta, Corn Laws, Reform
Bill (English), Fourteenth Amendment, Sherman Anti-
trust Law (but not such bills as have not yet become laws
nor such treaties or laws when cited otherwise than under
their formal titles: treaty at Versailles, Food bill).

19. Creeds and confessions of faith:

Apostles' Creed, Nicene Creed (but: ante-Nicene see 203,
208), Augsburg Confession, Thirty-nine Articles.

20. Civic holidays and ecclesiastical fast and feast days :
Fourth of July (the Fourth), Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day;
Easter, Passover, Feast of Tabernacles, New Year's Day.

21. Titles of honor and respect, whether religious,
civil, or military, preceding the name, and academic

12 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

degrees following the name; all titles of honor or
of nobility, when referring to specific persons,
either preceding the name or used in place of the
proper name; familiar names applied to particular
persons; orders (decorations) and the titles accom-
panying them; titles, without the name, used in
direct address; titles without the name when used
of existing incumbents of office; and such words
as "President," "King," "Sultan," and "Pope,"
standing alone, when referring to a specific ruler
or incumbent:

Queen Victoria, ex-President Cleveland, Rear-Admiral
Dewey, Brigadier General Brown, Lieutenant Commander
Smith; United States Commissioner of Education Harris,
Dr. Davis; Father Boniface, Deacon Smith; Timothy
Dwight, D.D., LL.D. ; James Brown, Doctor of Philosophy;
Thomas Graham, Fellow of the Royal Geographical Society;
the Prince of Wales, the Marquis of Lome, His Majesty,
His Grace; the Apostle to the Gentiles, "the Father of his
Country"; Order of the Red Eagle, Knight Commander
of the Bath; "Allow me to suggest, Judge . . . ."; the
Bishop of London; the Senator; "The President [of the
United States] was chosen arbitrator," "the Pope's policy."

But do not capitalize the official title of a person
when the title follows the name (see 49); when
standing alone, without the name (with the excep-
tions noted above, and see 49) ; or when, followed
by the name, it is preceded by the article "the":

Woodrow Wilson, president of the United States; B. L.
Gildersleeve, professor of Greek (see 49); Ferdinand W.

MANUAL OF STYLE: CAPITALIZATION 13

Peck, commissioner-general to the Paris Exposition; the
archbishop (meaning other than the existing incumbent),
the senator (when not speaking of the existing member),
the archduke Francis Ferdinand, the apostle Paul.

22. Abbreviations like Ph.D., M.P., and F.R.G.S., and

designations of celestial objects (see 48) (such
titles to be set without space between the letters)
(see 52, 103, 106).

23. Abbreviations consisting of one letter, except in
case of units of measurement and minor literary
subdivisions (see 54, 55, no, in):

R.V. (Revised Version), F. (Fahrenheit), C. (centigrade),
A (angstrom units) (but: p., 1., n., etc.).

24. Nouns and adjectives used to designate the Supreme
Being or Power, or any member of the Christian
Trinity; and all pronouns referring to the same,
when not closely preceded or followed by a dis-
tinctive name, or unless such reference is otherwise
perfectly clear:

the Almighty, Ruler of the universe, the First Cause, the
Absolute, Providence (personified), Father, Son, Holy Ghost,
the Spirit, Savior, Messiah, Son of Man, the Logos, [and
the Virgin Mary]; "Trust Him who rules all things" (but:
"When God had worked six days, he rested on the seventh").

But do not capitalize such expressions and deriva-
tives as

(God's) fatherhood, (Jesus') sonship, messiahship, messianic
hope, christological (but: Christology).

14 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

25. Words which have an acquired, limited, or special
meaning:

the Doctor's degree; a report of the Master (in chancery);
a Bachelor's hood; a Freshman.

But do not capitalize such expressions as
the doctorate, a master in chancery (the last two words being
explanatory, the capitalization of "master" is here no longer
necessary to indicate a special meaning).

26. "Nature" and similar terms, and abstract ideas,
when personified:

"Nature wields her scepter mercilessly"; "Vice in the old
English morality plays."

27. "Father" used for church father, and "reformers"
used of Reformation leaders, whenever the meaning
otherwise would be ambiguous:

the Fathers, the early Fathers, the Greek Fathers, [Pilgrim
Fathers], the Reformers (but: the church reformers of the
fifteenth century).

28. The word "church" in properly cited titles of
nationally organized bodies of believers in which,
through historical associations, it has become insepa-
rably linked with the name of a specific locality; or
when forming part of the name of a particular
edifice:

Church of Rome, Church of England, High Church; Church
of the Holy Sepulcher, Fifth Avenue Baptist Church, First
Methodist Church.

But do not capitalize, except as noted above, when
standing alone, in any sense universal, national,

MANUAL OF STYLE: CAPITALIZATION 15

local or when the name is not correctly or fully
quoted :

the church (= organized Christianity), the Eastern (Greek
Orthodox) church, the Roman Catholic church, the estab-
lished church (but: the Establishment), the state church; the
Baptist church in Englewood.

NOTE. In exceptional cases, where the opposition of Church
and State constitutes a fundamental part of the argument, and
it is desired to lend force to this antithesis, emphasis may be added
by capitalizing the two words.

29. Names for the Bible and other sacred books:

(Holy, Sacred) Scriptures, Holy Writ, Word of God, Book of
Books; Koran, Vedas, Mishna, the Upanishads; Apocrypha.

But do not capitalize adjectives derived from such

nouns :

biblical, scriptural, koranic, vedic, talmudic, apocryphal.

30. Versions and editions of the Bible:

King James's Version, Authorized Version (A.V.), Revised
Version (R.V.), Polychrome Bible, Septuagint (LXX),
Peshitto.

31. Books and divisions of the Bible and of other sacred
books (Christian or otherwise) (see 60) :

Old Testament, Pentateuch, Exodus, II (Second) Kings,
Book of Job, Psalms (Psalter), the [Mosaic] Law and the
[writings of the] Prophets, Minor Prophets, Wisdom Literature,
Gospel of Luke, Synoptic Gospels, Fourth Gospel, Acts of
the Apostles (the Acts), Epistle to the Romans, Pastoral
Epistles, Apocalypse (Revelation), Sermon on the Mount,
Beatitudes, Lord's Prayer, Ten Commandments (Decalogue),
Judith, Bel and the Dragon, the Koran, the Vedas.

1 6 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

But do not capitalize words like "book," "gospel,"
"epistle," "psalm" in such connections as

the five books of Moses, the first forty psalms, the gospels
and epistles of the New Testament, [the synoptic problem,
the synoptists], the biblical apocalypses.

32. Biblical parables:

the parable of the Prodigal Son.

33. Such miscellaneous terms as

Last Supper, Eucharist, the Passion, the Twelve (apostles),
the Seventy (disciples), the Servant, the Day of Yahweh, the
Chronicler, the Psalmist, the Golden Rule, the Kingdom of
God, or of Heaven.

34. The first word of a sentence, and in poetry the first
word of each line:

In summer, on the headlands,

The Baltic Sea along,
Sit Neckan, with his harp of gold,

And sings his plaintive song.

But in Greek and Latin poetry capitalize only the
first word of a paragraph, not of each verse (line) :

Town 8' dotSos aeiSe irepixAvTos, ot Sc cruairrj
eurr' axouovTCs' 6 8' 'A^atwv voarov aeiSev,
Avypdv, ov fK TpoirjS eTreretXaro IlaAAas 'Adrivrj.

TOV 8' VTTp(l)l6$V <f>p<TL (TVvOeTO QicrinV (ZOtS^V

Kovprj 'iKoptoio, Trcpu^pwv II^veXoTreta'

Talia praefantes quondam felicia Pelei
carmina diuino cecinerunt pectore Parcae
praesentes: namque ante domos inuisere castas
heroum et sese mortali ostendere coetu
caelicolae nondum spreta pietate solebant

MANUAL OF STYLE: CAPITALIZATION 17

35. The first word after a colon only when introducing
a complete passage, or sentence which would have
independent meaning, as in summarizations and
quotations not closely connected with what precedes;
or where the colon has the weight of such expres-
sion as "as follows," "namely," "for instance," or
a similar phrase, and is followed by a logically com-
plete sentence:

"In conclusion I wish to say: It will be seen from the above
that ...."; "As the old proverb has it: 'Haste makes
waste'"; "My theory is: The moment the hot current strikes
the surface . . . ."

But do not capitalize the first word of a quotation if
immediately connected with what precedes (unless,
as the first word of a sentence, beginning a paragraph
in reduced type) ; or the first word after a colon, if
an implied "namely," or a similar term, is followed
by a brief explanatory phrase, logically dependent
upon the preceding clause:

"The old adage is true that 'haste makes waste'"; "Two
explanations present themselves: either he came too late for
the train, or he was detained at the station."

36. As a rule, the first word in sections of an enumera-
tion, if any one link contains two or more distinct
clauses, separated by a semicolon, colon, or period,
unless all are dependent upon the same term pre-
ceding and leading up to them (see 138) :

His reasons for refusal were three: (i) He did not have the
time. (2) He did not have the means; or, at any rate, had no

l8 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

funds available at the moment. (3) He doubted the feasi-
bility of the plan. But: He objected that (i) he did not
have the time; (2) he did not have the means; or, at any
rate, had no funds available; (3) he doubted the feasibility
of the plan.

37. As a rule, nouns followed by a numeral particu-
larly a capitalized Roman numeral indicating
their order in a sequence; also sums of money in
German and French:

Room 16, Ps. 20, Grade IV, Act I, Vol. I, No. 2, Book II,
Div. Ill, Part IV, Plate III; M. 6; Fr. 5.

But do not capitalize such minor subdivisions of
publications as

sec 4, scene i, art. "Evidence," chap. 2 (ii), p. 7 (vii),
vs. n, 1. 5, n. 6. (See no.)

38. The first word of a cited speech (or thought) in
direct discourse, whether preceded by a colon or a
comma (on this see 131):

On leaving he remarked: "Never shall I forget this day";
With the words, "Never shall I forget this day," he departed;
I thought to myself: This day I shall never forget (without
quotation marks).

39. In resolutions, the first words following " WHEREAS"
and "Resolved":

WHEREAS, It has pleased God . . . . ; therefore be it
Resolved, That ....

40. The exclamations "O" and "Oh" (see 117):

"O Lord!" "I know not, Oh, I know not!" "Oh, that I
were home again!"

MANUAL OF STYLE: CAPITALIZATION 1 9

41. All the principal words (i.e., nouns, pronouns,
adjectives, adverbs, verbs, first and last words) in
English titles of publications (books, pamphlets, doc-
uments, periodicals, reports, proceedings, etc.), and
their divisions (parts, chapters, sections, poems,
articles, etc.) ; in subjects of lectures, papers, toasts,
etc.; in cap-and-small-cap and italic center-heads
(both of which, however, should be avoided), and
bold-face cut-in heads and side-heads; in cap-and-
small-cap box-heads in tables (see 279-83) :

The Men Who Made the Nation; The American College
Its Past and Present; the Report of the Committee oj Nine;
"In the Proceedings of the National Education Association
for 1907 there appeared a paper entitled, 'The Financial
Value of Education.'"

NOTE. The Botanical Gazette capitalizes only first words and
proper names; and the practice may properly be followed in
general bibliographies, such as are to be found under the title
"Literature Cited" in the Botanical Gazette (see 60). This style
is very generally followed by librarians and others in the com-
pilation of lists of books and publications.

42. In foreign titles, in addition to capitalizing the first
word, follow these general rules:

a) In Latin, capitalize proper nouns, and adjectives

derived therefrom:

De amicitia, Bettum Gallicum.

6) In French, Italian, Spanish, Swedish, and Nor-
wegian titles, capitalize proper nouns but not ad-
jectives derived therefrom :

20 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

Histoire de la litterature franfaise, Novelle e racconti popolari
iialiani, Antologia de poetas liricos castellanos, Svenska littera-
turens historic.

c} In German and Danish, capitalize all nouns but
not the adjectives, except German adjectives derived
from the names of persons:

Geschichte des deutschen Feudalwesens (but: die Homer ische
Frage), Videnskabens Fremskridt i detnittende Aarhundrede;
and in abbreviations, B.P.W. for Berliner philologische
W ochenschrift.

d) In Dutch, capitalize all nouns, and all adjectives
derived from proper nouns:
Geschiedenis der Nederlandsche Taal.

43. In mentioning titles of newspapers, magazines, and
similar publications, do not, as a rule, treat the
definite article as part of the title:

the Chicago Tribune, the School Review, the Annual Register
of the University of Chicago.

44. Titles of ancient manuscripts (singular, MS; plural,
MSS) (see 60):

Codex Bernensis, Cod. Canonicianus.

45. In titles with the main words capitalized, all nouns
forming parts of hyphenated compounds:

"Twentieth-Century Progress," "The Economy of High-
Speed Trains."

But do not capitalize such components when other
than nouns:

Fifty-first Street, "Lives of Well-known Authors," "World-
Dominion of English-speaking Peoples."

MANUAL OF STYLE: CAPITALIZATION 21

And in side-heads do not capitalize any but the first
word and proper nouns (see 56 and 172).

46. In botanical, geological, zoological, and paleonto-
logical matter, the scientific (Latin) names of divi-
sions, orders, families, and genera, but not their
English derivatives:

Cotylosauria, but: cotylosaurs; Felidae, but: felids;
Carnivora, but: carnivores.

Also in botanical and zoological matter, the names
of species, if derived from names of persons, or
from generic names; but in geological and medical
matter the names of species are never capitalized:

Felis leo, Cocos nucifera, Rosa Carolina, Parkinsonia Torrey-
ana, Styrax californica, Lythrum hyssopifolia, Phyleuma
Halleri, Car ex Halleriana (but [geological] : Pterygomatopus
schmidti, Conodectus favosus). (See 71.)

47. The names and epithets of peoples, races, and tribes:

Kafir, Negro (in its ethnic sense), Hottentot, Makassar,
Buginese, Celestials.

48. In astronomical work, the names of the bodies of
the planets, stars, and groups of stars (but not
"sun," "earth," "moon," "stars"); designations
of celestial objects in well-known catalogues ; also
the Flams teed numbers:

Saturn, Ursa Major, the Milky Way, the Great Bear;
M 13 (for No. 13 of Messier's Catalogue of Nebulae and
Clusters). Bond 619, N.G.C. 6165, B.D.-i8487i; 85
Pegasi, Lalande 5761.

22 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

49. Divisions, departments, officers, and courses of
study of the University of Chicago, in all official
work dealing with its administration or curricula:

(the University), the School of Education (the School), the
University Extension Division (but: the division), the Depart-
ment of Anthropology (also: the Department); the Board
of Trustees (the Trustees, the Board), the Senate, the
Council, University College (also: the College), the School
of Commerce and Administration (also: the School), the
Faculty of the College of Commerce and Administration,
Dean of the Faculties (also: the Faculty); .the President,
the Recorder, Professor of Physics, Assistant in Chemistry,
Fellow, Scholar; the Van Husen Scholarship (but: the
scholarship); courses in Political Economy, Autumn Quarter
(but: a quarter), First Term (but: two terms; major, minor);
[Hall (referring to the University dormitories)].

USE CAPITALS AND SMALL CAPITALS FOR

50. The names of town and state in the date line, and
the salutatory phrase at the beginning, of letters,
and the signature and residence at the end of letters
or articles, etc.:

CHICAGO, ILL., January i, 1911

(Set to the right, with one em's indention, and preferably in
smaller type than the body of the letter.)

MY DEAR MR. SMITH:

(Set flush, followed by a colon, in the same type as the body
of the letter, and in a separate line, unless preceded by
another line giving the name and address, in which case it

MANUAL OF STYLE: CAPITALIZATION 23

should be run in with the text of the letter, indented as a
paragraph [see 64].)

CHARLES W. SCOTT

(Set to the right, with one em's indention, and in the same
type as the body of the letter or article.)

HARVARD UNIVERSITY

CAMBRIDGE, MASS.

June 7, 1911

(Set to the left, with two ems' indention, in smaller type.)
(Each line of the address should be in caps and small caps,
and should be centered on the one preceding. The date
should be in caps and lower case, likewise centered on those
above.)

51. In resolutions, the word "WHEREAS" (see 39); in
notes (not footnotes), the word "NOTE," which
should be followed by a period and a dash; in con-
stitutions, by-laws, etc., the word "SECTION" intro-
ducing paragraphs and followed by a number:

NOTE. It should be noticed that ....

SECTION i. This association shall be styled ....

The usual practice is to abbreviate the word
"section" each time it is used in such a connection
except the first:

SECTION i. The name of the association ....
SEC. 2. The object of the association ....

SET IN SMALL CAPITALS

52. A.M. and P.M. (ante and post meridiem), and B.C.
and A.D. ("before Christ" and anno Domini); these

24 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

should be set without a space between (see 22,

103, 106, 219):

11:30 A.M.; 53 B.C., 1906 A.D.

USE SMALL (i.e., "lower-case") INITIAL LETTER FOR

53. Words of common usage, originally proper names,
and their derivatives in whose present, generalized
acceptation the origin has become obscured, and
generally all verbs derived from proper names
(see i) :

Utopia, bohemian, philistine, titanic, platonic, quixotic,
bonanza, china, morocco, guinea-pig, boycott, roman (type),
italicize, anglicize, macadamize, paris green.

54. In literary references, such minor subdivisions and
their abbreviations as

chapter, section, page, article, verse, line, note; chap., sec.,
p., art., vs., 1., n. (See 37, no, and 237.)

55. Units of measurement as

h.=hour, min.=minute, sec.=second; lb.=pound, oz.=
ounce; yd.=yard, ft. = foot; etc.

56. In side-heads, all but the first word and proper
names (see 172 and 280).

57. The first word of a quotation which, through a con-
junction or otherwise, is immediately connected with
what precedes, even if such word in the original
begins a sentence.

For illustration and exception see 35 and 131.

MANUAL OF STYLE: ITALICS 25

THE USE OF ITALICS
ITALICIZE

58. Words or phrases to which it is desired to lend
emphasis, importance, etc.:

"This was, however, not the case"; "It is sufficiently plain
that the sciences of life, at least, are studies of processes."

But beware of the excessive use of italics, for the
appearance of the over-italicized page is not
pleasing and the too frequent use of italics for
emphasis weakens the text. See note to 41.

59. Words and phrases from foreign languages, inserted
into the English text, and not incorporated into the
English language; and also (as a rule) single sen-
tences or brief passages not of sufficient length to
call for reduced type (see 85) :

"the Darwinian Weltanschauung"; "Napoleon's coup d'etat";
"the debater par excellence of the Senate "; "De gustibus non
est disputandum, or, as the French have it, Chacun & son
goto."

But do not italicize foreign titles preceding names,
or names of foreign institutions or places the meaning
or position of which in English would have required
roman type, and which either are without English
equivalents or are by preference used in lieu of these:

Pere Lagrange, Freiherr von Schwenau; the German
Reichstag, the Champs Elysees, the Museo delle Tenne;

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

nor words of everyday occurrence which have become
sufficiently anglicized, even though still retaining the
accents of the original language:

addendum

chiaroscuro

ensemble

(plur. -da)

clientele

entente

ad interim

confrere

entree

ad lib[itumj

connoisseur

entrep6t

ad valorem

consensus

entrepreneur

aide de camp

contra

erratum (plur. -a)

alias

contretemps

et cetera

alibi

corrigendum

ex cathedra

Alma Mater

(plur. -da)

ex officio

amateur

coup d'e"tat

expose

anno Domini

coup de grace

facade

ante-bellum

creche

facsimile

a posteriori

criterion (plur. -a)

faience

a priori

cul-de-sac

fete

apropos

datum (plur. -a)

finis

atelier

debris

fracas

attache

debut

gratis

au revoir

decollete

Gymnasium

barrage

delicatessen

(German)

bas-relief

demilune

habeas corpus

beau ideal

demimonde

habitue

billet doux

demirelievo

hangar

bona fide

demi-tasse

hegira

bon ton

denouement

hors d'ceuvres

bouillon

depdt (= deposi-

innuendo

bourgeois

tory)

laissez faire

bourgeoisie

de rigueur

lese majeste

bravo

detour

levee

bric-a-brac

dilettante

litterateur

cabaret

divorcee

litterati

cafe

doctrinaire

Magna C[h]arta

camouflage

dramatis per-

mandamus

cantina

sonae

marchen

carte blanche

eclat

massage

chaperon

elite

matador

charge d'affaires

encore

matinee

chauffeur

ennui

melange

chef d'oeuvre

en route

melee

MANUAL OF STYLE: ITALICS

portmonnaie

savant

milieu

postmortem (n.

senor

mitrailleuse

and adj.)

seraglio

post obit

sobriquet

naive

prima facie

soiree

nee

pro and con[tra]

spirituel

neve

proces verbal

stein

niche

pro rata

subpoena

nil

protege

tte-a-tete

nol[le] pros[equi]

pro tem[pore]

tonneau

nom de plume

protocol

ultimatum

onus

queue

umlaut

papier mache

quondam

verbatim

par excellence

ragout

verso

parvenu

regime

versus (v., vs.) 1

paterfamilias

rendezvous

via

patois

resume

vice versa

per annum

reveille

vis-a-vis

per capita

role

vise

per contra

sauerkraut

viva voce

per se

1 But italicize v. or vs. when standing between two opposing terms not
themselves italicized (see 63) when otherwise the meaning would not be clear:
Michigan vs. Minnesota, 3 to o.

But do not hyphenate any of these foreign words
when used as adjectives.

60. Titles of publications books (including plays, essays,
cycles of poems, single poems of considerable length,
and symphonies, usually printed separately, and
not from the context understood to form parts of a
large volume [see 81]), pamphlets, treatises, tracts,
documents, operas, oratorios, and periodicals (in-
cluding regularly appearing proceedings and trans-
actions; and also the name of a journal appearing
in the journal itself, and the word "journal,"
"review," etc., standing alone, if a part of the

28 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

name of the publication) (see 41) ; and in the case
of newspapers, periodicals, etc., the name of the
city (where published) when forming an integral
part of the name :

Spencer, Principles of Sociology; A Midsummer-Night's
Dream; Idylls of the King; Paradise Lost; The Messiah;
Lohengrin; the Modern Language Review, the Chicago
Tribune, the Indianapolis Star, Report of the United Slates
Commissioner of Education, Groningen Publications, No. 27.

NOTE. The Botanical Gazette uses italics for such titles in the
text only; in footnotes, roman. Its own name it prints in caps
and small caps BOTANICAL GAZETTE.

This rule may be departed from in lengthy biblio-
graphical lists, in tables, or in other matter where
to follow it would result in an undue preponder-
ance of italics (see note to 41).
Books of the Bible, both canonical and apocryphal,
and titles of ancient manuscripts should be set in
roman type, as also symbols used to designate
manuscripts (see 31 and 44) :
Psalms 53: 10, Di6, Mb, P, J.

61. The following words, phrases, and abbreviations
used in literary and legal references:

ad loc., circa (ca.), et al., ibid., idem, infra, loc. cit., op. cit.,
passim, sic, sc., supra, s.v., vide.

But do not italicize

cf., e.g., i.e., v. or vs. (versus) (unless ambiguity would
result; see note to 59), viz., etc.

MANUAL OF STYLE: ITALICS 29

62. The words See and See also, when used in an index
or similar compilation, for the purpose of a cross-
reference, where the differentiation of those words
from the context is desirable ; and the words for
and read in lists of errata, to separate them from
the incorrect and correct readings:

See also Sociology; for levee read Iev6e.

63. The names of plaintiff and defendant in the citation
of legal causes; also the titles of proceedings con-
taining such prefixes as in re, ex parte, and in the
matter of, etc. :

Conolly v. Union Sewer Pipe Co.; In re Smith; Ex parte
Brown; In the matter of the petition of Henry Robinson for a
writ of habeas corpus.

64. Address lines in speeches, reports, etc., and primary
address lines in letters (set flush, in a separate line,
with nouns capitalized [see 50]) :

Mr. President, Ladies and Gentlemen:
Mr. John Smith, 321 Dearborn Street, Chicago, III.
DEAR SIR: I take pleasure in announcing ....

65. In signatures, the position or title added after the
name. If this consists of only one word, it is run into
the same line with the name; if of more than one,
but no longer than the name, center the first letter
under the name line, and indent one em on the
right; if longer than the name, center the name over

30 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

the second line and set this flush. These rules are,
however, subject to the exigencies of special cases:

ARTHUR P. MAGUIRE, Secretary
Yours very truly,

CARTER H. HARRISON

Mayor of Chicago

CHARLES M. GAYLEY
Professor of English Language and Literature

66. a), b), c), etc., used to indicate subdivisions (single
parenthesis if beginning a paragraph, double paren-
theses if "run in"); and a, 6, c, etc., affixed to the
number of verse, page, etc., to denote fractional part:
Luke 4:310.

67. Letters used to designate unknown quantities, lines,
etc., in algebraic, geometrical, and similar matter:
ac+bc=c(a+b); the lines ad and A D; the nth power.

68. As a rule, letters in legends or in the text referring
to corresponding letters in accompanying illustra-
tions whether or not they are in italics on the
illustration :

"At the point A above (see diagram)."

69. References to particular letters:
the letter u, a small v, a capital S.

But do not italicize a letter used in the place of a
name in hypothetical statements or in cases where

MANUAL OF STYLE: ITALICS 31

only the initial is used with a dash or as a simple
abbreviation :

"A bought land from B without registration of title";

"The news was brought at once to General M "; "Mr.

G. was not at home when we called."

70. s. and<f. (= shillings and pence) following numerals:
3*. 6d. (See 270.)

71. In zoological, geological, and paleontological mat-
ter, scientific (Latin) names of genera and species
when used together, the generic name being in the
nominative singular :

Felis leo, Rosa Carolina, Conodectes favosus, Phyteuma
Halleri. (See 46, 48.)

In botanical, geological, and paleontological matter,
the names of genera and species when used together,
and of genera, only, when used alone:
Acer saccharum, Basidiobolus, Alternaria, Erythrosuchits.
In medical matter, however, the general practice
is to print such names in roman, avoiding italics
altogether.

In astronomical and astrophysical matter :
a) The lower-case letters designating certain
Fraunhof er lines :
a, b, g, h.

6) The lower-case letters used by Baeyer to desig-
nate certain stars in constellations for which the
Greek letters have been exhausted:
f Tauri, u Herculis.

32 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

c) When initials are used to express the titles of
catalogues, as such, and not to designate a
particular celestial object, such initials are to be
italicized (see 48, 60) :
B.D.,N.G.C.

d} Symbols for the chemical elements:
H, Ca, Ti.

In accordance with the best modern practice,
italics should no longer be used for:

a) The capital letters given by Fraunhofer to
spectral lines :
A-H, and K.

6) The letters designating the spectral types of

stars :

AS, 64, Mb.

c) The capital letter H with different Greek letters,
used to designate the various lines of hydrogen:
Ha, H/?, etc.

72. In resolutions, italicize the word "Resolved." (See
39-)

73. After headlines or titles, as a rule, the word "Con-
tinued" ; and "To be continued" at the end of articles
(see 179) :

THE SCOPE OF SOCIOLOGY Continued
[To be continued]

MANUAL OF STYLE: QUOTATIONS 33

QUOTATIONS 1

PUT BETWEEN QUOTATION MARKS (and in roman type
i.e., "roman-quote") 1

74. Citations, run into the text, of a passage from an
author in his own words (see 85).

75. Quotations from different authors, or from different
works by the same author, following each other,
uninterrupted by any intervening original matter, or
by any reference to their respective sources (other
than a reference figure for a footnote), even though
such quotations are reduced (see 85-87) .

76. A word or phrase accompanied by its definition:
"Drop-folio" means a page-number at the foot of the page.

77. An unusual, technical, ironical, etc., word or phrase
in the text, whether or not accompanied by a word,
like "so-called," directing attention to it:

Her "five o' clocks" were famous in the neighborhood; She
was wearing a gown of "lobster-colored" silk; He was elected
"master of the rolls"; We then repaired to what he called
his "quarter deck"; A "lead" is then inserted between the
lines; This so-called "man of affairs."

78. In translations, the English equivalent of a word,
phrase, or passage from a foreign language :
Weltanschauung, "world- view" or "fundamental aspect of
life"; Mommsen, Rimische Geschichte ("History of Rome").

l ln French small angle marks are used for quotation marks; in German two
primes on one type body are used.

34 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

79. The particular or unusual word or words to which
attention is directed :

the term "lynch law"; the phrase "liberty of conscience";
the concepts "good" and "bad"; the name "Chicago."

But not in matter discussing terms or words where

the meaning is clear:

The definition of the word God.

80. Titles of book series:

"English Men of Letters Series"; "International Critical
Commentary"; the series "Handbooks of Ethics and
Religion."

81. Titles of shorter poems (see 60):
Shelley's "To a Skylark."

82. Cited titles of subdivisions (e.g., parts, books, chap-
ters, etc.) of publications; titles of papers, lectures,
sermons, articles, toasts, mottoes, etc.:

The Beginnings of the Science of Political Economy, Vol. I,
"The British School," chap, ii, "John Stuart Mill"; the
articles "Cross," "Crucifixion," and "Crusade" in Hast-
ings' Dictionary of the Bible; The subject of the lecture was
"Japan Its Past, Present, and Future"; the next toast on
the program was "Our Canadian Visitor"; The king's
motto is "For God and My Country."

NOTE. The Botanical Gazette, in footnotes, does not use
quotation marks for such titles.

References to the Preface, Introduction, Table of
Contents, Index, etc., of a specific work, should be
set with capitals, without quotation marks:

Preface, p. iii; "The Introduction contains ...."; "The
Appendix occupies a hundred pages"; but: "The book has
a very complete index."

MANUAL OF STYLE: QUOTATIONS 35

83. Names of ships:

the U.S. SS." Oregon."

84. Titles of pictures and works of art:
Murillo's "The Holy Family."

SET IN SMALLER TYPE

85. Ordinarily, all prose extracts which will make five
or more lines in the smaller type, and all poetry
citations of two lines or more. An isolated prose
quotation may properly be run into the text if it
bears an organic relation to the argument presented.
But a quotation of one or two lines which is closely
preceded or followed by longer extracts in smaller type
may be reduced as a matter of uniform appearance.

86. As a rule, reduce from n pt. and 10 pt. to 9 pt.,
from 9 pt. to 8 pt., from 8 pt. to 6 pt. (see 252).

87. Reduced citations should not have quotation marks,
except in such cases as noted in 75; nor should
quotation marks, as a rule, be used in connection
with italics.

GENERAL RULES

88. Quotation marks should always include ellipses, and
the phrase "etc." when it otherwise would not be
clear that it stands for an omitted part of the matter
quoted, perfect clearness in each individual case
being the best criterion:

"Art. II, sec. 2, of the Constitution provides that 'each state
shall appoint .... a number of electors equal to the whole
number of senators and representatives . . . .'"; "He also

36 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

wrote a series of 'Helps to Discovery, etc.'" "etc." here
indicating, not that he wrote other works which are unnamed,
but that the title of the one named is not given in full; but,
on the other hand: "Preaching from the text, 'For God so

loved the world,' etc " "etc." here being placed

outside of the quotation marks in order to show that it does
not stand for other, unnamed, objects of God's love.

89. Quoted prose matter (i.e., matter set with quotation
marks; see above) which is broken up into para-
graphs should have the quotation marks repeated
at the beginning of each paragraph.

90. Where alignment is desired, the quotation marks
should be "cleared" i.e., should project beyond
the line of alignment:

"Keep away from dirtiness keep away from mess.
Don't get into doin' things rather-more-or-less ! "

91. Double quotation marks are used for primary quota-
tions; for a quotation within a quotation, single;
going back to double for a third, to single for a
fourth, and so on:

"Let me quote from Rossetti's Life of Keats" he said.
"Mr. Rossetti writes as follows:

"'To one of these phrases a few words of comment may
be given. That axiom which concludes the "Ode on a
Grecian Urn"

'""Beauty is truth, truth beauty that is all

Ye know on earth, and all ye need to know,"
is perhaps the most important contribution to thought
which the poetry of Keats contains: it pairs with and
transcends

"'"A thing of beauty is a joy forever."'

"And now I shall conclude my first point," he continued,
"by remarking that . . . ."

MANUAL OF STYLE: SPELLING 37

SPELLING
SPELL OUT

92. All religious, civil, and military titles of honor and
respect, and forms of address, preceding the name,
except Mr., Messrs., Mrs. (French: M., MM.,
Mme, Mile), Dr., Rev., Hon., St. (do not, except
in quotations and in correspondence, set the Rev.,
the Hon.); Esq., following the name, should like-
wise always be abbreviated.

93. Christian names, as George, Charles, John (not:
Geo., Chas., Jno.), except where the abbreviated
form is used in quoted matter or in original signa-
tures; and "von" as part of a person's name (see
240) ; references in text (not parenthetical or foot-
note citations) to chapters, pages, lines, figures,
etc. (See 69.)

94. Subject to the exceptions named at the end of this
section, in ordinary reading-matter, all numbers of
less than three digits, unless of a statistical or
technical character, or unless occurring in groups
of six or more following each other in close succes-
sion. (See 2736.)

"There are thirty -eight cities in the United States with a
population of 100,000 or over"; "a fifty-yard dash"; "two
pounds of sugar"; "Four horses, sixteen cows, seventy-six
sheep, and a billy goat constituted the live stock of the farm";
"He spent a total of two years, three months, and seventeen

38 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

days in jail." But: "He spent 128 days in the hospital";
"a board 20 feet 2 inches long by i$ feet wide and ij inches
thick"; "the ratio of 16 to i"; "In some quarters of Paris,
inhabited by wealthy families, the death-rate is i to every 65
persons; in others, inhabited by the poor, it is i to 15"; "His
purchase consisted of 2 pounds of sugar, 20 pounds of flour,
i pound of coffee, \ pound of tea, 3 pounds of meat, and
ij pounds of fish, besides 2 pecks of potatoes and a pint of
vinegar."

Treat all numbers in connected groups alike, as far
as possible; do not use figures for some and spell out
others; if the largest contains three or more digits,
use figures for all (see 96) :

"The force employed during the three months was 87, 93,
and 106, respectively."

As a general rule, however, decimals, degrees,
dimensions, distances, enumerations, money, per-
centage, weights, and like matter should be
expressed in figures:

10, 45 miles, 3 cubic feet, 24 pages, 100 bushels, 9 per cent
(see 123), 45 pounds, $1,000, etc.

95. Round numbers (i.e., approximate figures in even
units, the unit being 100 in numbers of less than
1,000, and 1,000 in numbers of more) :

"The attendance was estimated at five hundred" (but: "at
550"); "a thesis of about three thousand words" (but: "of
about 2,700"); "The population of Chicago is approximately
three millions" (but: "2,900,000"). Cases like 1,500, if for
some special reason spelled out, should be written "fifteen
hundred," not "one thousand five hundred."

MANUAL OF STYLE: SPELLING 39

96. All numbers, no matter how high, and all terms of
measurement or number otherwise abbreviated,
commencing a sentence in ordinary reading-matter:
"Five hundred and ninety-three men, 417 women, and 126
children under eighteen, besides 63 of the crew, went down
with the ship"; "Figure 3 shows the comparative difference
in prices."

When this is impracticable, or for any reason unde-
sirable, reconstruct the sentence; e.g.:
"The total number of those who went down with the ship
was 593 men," etc.

97. Sums of money, when occurring in isolated cases in
ordinary reading-matter :

"The admission was two dollars."
When several such numbers occur close together, and
in all matter of a statistical character, use figures:
"Admission: men, $2; women, $i; children, 25 cents."

98. Time of day, in ordinary reading-matter:

at four; at half-past two in the afternoon; at seven o'clock.
Statistically, in enumerations, and always in connec-
tion with A.M. and P.M., use figures:
at 4: 15 P.M. (omit "o'clock" in such connections).

99. Ages:

eighty years and four months old; children between six and
fourteen.

100. Numbers of centuries, of Egyptian dynasties, of
sessions of Congress, of military bodies, of political
divisions, of thoroughfares, and in all similar cases,
unless brevity is an important consideration (see
7, 8, and 13) :

40 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

nineteenth century; Fifth Dynasty; Fifty-fourth Congress,
second session; Fifteenth Infantry I.N.G.; Sixth Con-
gressional District, Second Ward; Fifth Avenue.

101. References to particular decades:
in the nineties (see 165).

102. Names of months, except in statistical matter or in
long enumerations:

from January i to April 15 (omit, after dates, st, d, and th).

103. "United States," except in quotations and such con-
nections as: General Schofield, U.S.A.; U.S. SS.
" Oregon"; in footnotes and similar references: U.S.
Geological Survey (see 22, 52, 106).

104. "Railroad (-way)," and "Fort," "Mount," and
"Port" in geographical appellations (see 4):

Chicago, Milwaukee & St. Paul Railroad (not: R.R. orRy.);
Fort Wayne, Mount Elias, Port Huron.

105. In most cases, all names of publications. This rule,
like many another, is open to modification in particu-
lar instances, for expediency, nature of context,
authoritative usage, and author's preference. Gen-
erally, if in doubt, spell out; good taste will
condone offenses in this direction more readily than
in the opposite.

ABBREVIATE

106. Names of states, territories, and possessions of the
United States following those of towns, as follows,
without space between the letters of abbrevia-
tions (see 22, 52, 103), when mentioned in lists,
signatures, bibliographical matter, etc., but not
ordinarily in text-matter:

MANUAL OF STYLE: SPELLING 41

Ala.

Iowa

Neb.

Samoa

Alaska

Kan.

Nev.

S.C.

Ariz.

Ky.

N.H.

S.D.

Ark.

La.

NJ.

Tenn.

Cal.

Me.

N.M.

Tex.

Colo.

Mass.

N.Y.

T.H. = Territory

Conn.

Md.

Ohio

of Hawaii

B.C.

Mich.

Okla.

Utah

Del.

Minn.

Ore.

Vt.

Fla.

Miss.

Pa.

Va.

Ga.

Mo.

P.I. = Philippine

Wash.

Idaho

Mont.

Islands

Wis.

111.

N.C.

P.R. = Porto Rico W.Va.

Ind.

N.D.

R.I.

Wyo.

107. In technical matter (footnote references, bibliogra-
phies, etc.), "Company" and "Brothers," and the
word "and" (& =" short and" or "ampersand"), in
names of commercial firms:

The Macmillan Co., Macmillan & Co., Harper Bros.;
Chicago, Milwaukee & St. Paul Railroad.

In text-matter, not of a technical character, " Com-
pany " and " Brothers" may, however, be spelled out:

"Harper Brothers have recently published . . . ."; "The
Century Company announces . . . ."; "The extraordinary
story of the South Sea Company."

And when the name of a commercial concern does
not consist of proper names, the "and" should be
spelled out:

American Steel and Wire Co.

108. "Saint" or "Saints" before a name:

St. Louis, St. Peter's Church, SS. Peter and Paul.

109.

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

"St." should, however, be omitted in connection
with names of apostles, evangelists, church fathers:
Luke, Paul, Augustine; not: St. Luke, St. Paul, etc.

In exact references 1 to Scripture passages (134, 173),
the books of the Bible and of the Apocrypha,
the Apocalyptic, and versions of the Bible:

OLD TESTAMENT

Gen.
Exod.
Lev.
Num.
Deut
Josh.
Judg.
Ruth
I and II Sam.
I and II Kings

Matt.
Mark
Luke
John
Acts
Rom.
I and II Cor.

I and II Esd.
Tob.=Tobit
Jth.= Judith
Rest of Esther

En.
Sib. Or.

I and II Chron. Isa. Jonah
Ezra Jer. Mic.
Neh. Lam. Nah.
Esther Ezek. Hab.
Job Dan. Zeph.
Ps. (Pss.) Hos. Hag.
Prov. Joel Zech.
Eccles. Amos Mai.
Song of Sol. (or Obad.
Cant.)

NEW TESTAMENT

Gal. Philem.
Eph. Heb.
Phil. Jas.
Col. I and II Pet.
I and II Thess. I, II, and III John
I and II Tim. Jude
Titus Rev.

APOCRYPHA (APOC.)

Wisd. of Sol. Sus.
Ecclus. Bel and Dragon
Bar. Pr. of Man.
Song of Three I, II, III, and IV
Children Mace.

APOCALYPTIC

Asmp. M. Ps. Sol. Bk. Jub.
Apoc. Bar. XII P. Asc. Isa.

1 But in text matter do not abbreviate references to whole books or chapters
: 'The story is presented in Revelation, chapter 10."

MANUAL OF STYLE: SPELLING 43

VERSIONS OF THE BIBLE COMMONLY REFERRED TO

A.V. = Authorized Version.

R.V. = Revised Version.

R.V.m. = Revised Version, margin.

A. R.V. = American Standard Revised Version.

A.R.V.m. = American Standard Revised Version, margin.

E.R.V. = English Revised Version.

E.R.V.m. = English Revised Version, margin.

E.V. = English Version(s) of the Bible.

Vulg. = Vulgate.

LXX = Septuagint.

MT =Masoretic text

no. In parenthetical literary references, in footnotes,
and in matter of a bibliographical character, "vol-
ume," "number," "psalm," "division," "chapter,"
"article," "section," "page," "column," "verse,"
"line," "note," "figure," followed by their number
(see 37, 96, and 237); and the word "following"
after the number to denote continuance:

Vol. I (plural, Vols.), No. i (Nos.), Ps. 20 (Pss.), Div. Ill,
chap, ii (chaps.), art. iii (arts.), sec. 4 (sees.), p. 5 (pp.),
col. 6 (cols.), vs. 7 (vss.), 1. 8 (11.), n. 9 (nn.), Fig. 7 (Figs.);
PP- S~7 (= pages 5 to 7 inclusive), pp. $f. (=page 5 and the
following page), pp. sff. (=page 5 and the following
pages) ; ed (d) . ( = edition[s]) .

in. The common designations of weights and measures
in the metric system, as well as the symbols of meas-
urement in common use, when following a numeral:

i m., 2 dm., 3 cm., 4 mm.; c.m. (=cubic meter), c.d., c.c.,
c.mm.; sq. mi. ( = square mile); gm. ( = gram); gr.
( = grain); h. ( = hour), min. ( = minute), sec. (= second);
Ib. ( = pound), oz. ( = ounce); yd., ft., in.; kg. (=kilogram),
kw. ( = kilowatt); mg. ( = milligram) ; mag. ( = magnitude),
A ( = angstrom units), h.p. (= horse-power), C. (= Centi-
grade), F. (= Fahrenheit), etc. (See 123.)

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

The following is a list of the standard abbreviations for
technical values, recommended by the American Insti-
tute of Electrical Engineers:

alternating current .

brake horse-power .
boiler horse-power .
British thermal units
candle-power
centimeters .
circular mils .
counter electromotive

a-c. (when used as a compound
adjective; otherwise spell out)
b.h.p.
boiler h.p.
B.t.u.
c-p.
cm.
cir. mils

force

counter e.m.f.

cubic

cu.

direct current

d-c. (when used as

a compound

adjective; otherwise spell out)

electric horse-power

e.h.p.

electromotive force .

e.m.f.

feet

ft.

foot-pounds ....

ft-lb.

gallons

gal.

grains

gr-

grams

g. or gm.

gram-calories

g-cal.

hours

hr.

inches

in.

indicated horse-power .

i.h.p.

kilograms ....

kg.

kilogram-meters

kg-m.

kilogram-calories

kg-cal.

kilometers ....

km.

kilowatts

kw.

kilowatt-hours .

kw-hr.

magnetomotive force

m.m.f.

miles per hour (second) .

m.p.hr. (sec.)

millimeters ....

mm.

milligrams ....

mg.

minutes

min.

meters

meter-kilograms

m-kg.

MANUAL OF STYLE: SPELLING 45

pounds Ib. (not Ibs.)

revolutions per minute . rev. per min., or r.p.m.

seconds sec.

square sq.

square-root-of-mean-

square effective, or r.m.s.

kilovolts kv.

kilovolt-amperes . . kv-a.

watt-hours .... watt-hr..

watts per candle-power watts per c-p.

yards yd.

NOTE. In the case of hyphenated abbreviations, the first ele-
ment of the compound does not take a period.

GENERAL RULES

112. In extracts from modern authors whose spelling and
punctuation differ but slightly from ours, and where
such variations do not affect the meaning, use office
style. In citations from Old English works, and
in cases where it appears to be essential to the
writer's plan or the requirements of the context to
give a faithful rendering, follow the original copy.
Titles should always be accurately quoted.

113. Form the possessive of proper names ending in s or
another sibilant, if monosyllabic, by adding an
apostrophe and s; if of more than one syllable, by
adding an apostrophe only, except names ending
in -ce (see 165) :

King James's Version, Burns's poems, Marx's theories;
Moses' law, Jesus' birth, Demosthenes' orations, Berlioz'
compositions; Horace's odes.

But in the case of proper names ending in a silent
sibilant the possessive is formed by the addition

46 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

of the apostrophe and s, whether the word is

monosyllabic or not:

Charlevoix's discoveries, Des Moines's population.

114. Before sounded h, long u (or eu), and the words
"one," "once," use "a" as the form of the indefinite
article:

a hotel, a harmonic rendition, a historical work, a union,
a euphonious word, such a one.

115. The ligatures & and ce are not used at the present
day, either in Latin and Greek words, or in words
adopted into English from these languages. In
English these words are written either with ae, oe,
separately, or with e alone. The ligature is re-
tained, however, in Old English and in French:

aetas; Oedipus Tyrannus; aesthetic; (but: ceuvre,
French); but: maneuver; Alfred (Alfred in English).

116. Differentiate "farther" and "further" by using the
former in the sense of "more remote," "at a greater
distance" (with verbs of action); the latter in the
sense of "moreover," "in addition":

the farther end; he went still farther; further, he suggested; a
further reason.

117. In forms of address (vocative) use the "O" without
a comma following; for an exclamation use "Oh,"
followed by a comma or an exclamation point
(see 40) :

"O thou most mighty ruler!" "Oh, why did not Cerberus
drag me back to hell ?"

MANUAL OF STYLE: SPELLING

1 1 8. The following participles retain the final e in the
primary word:

agreeing hieing singeing

dyeing hoeing tingeing

eyeing shoeing vicing

The following participles illustrate those that omit
the e before the terminal :

abridging
acknowledging
aging

encouraging judging
filing mistaking
firing moving

arguing

glazing

organizing

awing

gluing

owing

biting

grudging

trudging

bluing

icing

truing

changing

issuing

1 19. Spell:

abridgment

aye

clamor

dulness

accouter

backward

clinch

dwelt

acknowledgment

bark (vessel)

clue

embitter

adz

barreled

coeval

emir

aegis

bazaar

color

employee

Aeolian

Beduin

controller

encyclopedic

aeroplane

behavior

cotillion

endeavor

aesthetic

biased

councilor

enfold

afterward

blessed

counselor

engulf

almanac

bowlder

cozy

enrol

ambassador

burned

cue

ensnare

amid

caesura

defense

envelope (n.)

among

caliber

demarcation

enwrapped

anemia

canceled

demeanor

equaled

appareled

candor

descendant (n.)

Eskimo

appendixes

cannoneer

diarrhea

esophagus

(of book)

canyon

dieresis

exhibitor

arbor

carcass

disheveled

fantasy

archaeology

caroled

disk

favor

ardor

castor (roller)

dispatch

fetish

armor

caviler

distil

fetus

ascendancy

center

downward

fiber

ascendent

check

draft

flavor

Athenaeum

chiseled

drought

fluorid

chock-full

dueler

focused

4 8

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

forward intrench

fulfil (fulfilled) intrust

fulness inward

gaiety jeweled

Galilean Judea

gild (to cover judgment

with gold) katabolism

gipsy kidnaper (but
glamor (kidnapped)

glycerin Koran

goodbye labeled

graveled labor

gray lacquer

Graeco-Roman leukocyte

gruesome leveled

guarantee (v.) libeled

guaranty (n.) liter

guild (an organi- loath

zation) lodgment

hamartiology Lukan

harbor maneuver

hematoxylin Markan

hemorrhage marshaled

Hindu marvelous

honor meager

imbed medieval

impaneled meter

imperiled miter

incase modeled

inclose Mohammedan

incrust mold

incumbrance molt

indexes (of book) moneyed

indices (mathe- moneys

matical only) movable

indorse mustache

ingraft nearby (adj.)

instal (installed) neighbor

instil (instilled)
insure

niter
odor

offense

one's self

outward

oxid

paean

paleography

paleontology

Paleozoic

paneled

paraffin

parceled

parole

parquet

partisan

peddler

penciled

Phoenix

pigmy

plow

practice

(n. and v.)
pretense
primeval
program
quarreled
quartet
raveled
reconnoiter
refill
reinforce
rencounter
reverie
rhyme
rigor
rivaled
riveted
ruble
rumor
saber
salable

Savior

savor

scepter

sepulcher

skepticism

skilful

smolder

specter

staunch

steadfast

subtle

succor j

sumac ,

syrup

taboo

talc

technique 1

theater

thraldom

thrash

timbre (of

music)
today
tormentor
toward
trammeled
tranquilize
tranquillity
traveler
trousers
truncated
upward
vapor
vendor
vigor
whiskey
wilful
woeful
woolen

worshiper

NOTE. Make one word of "anyone," "everyone," "today,"
"tomorrow," "tonight," "cannot" (see 204). Distinguish
between "sometimes" and "some time(s)," "someone"
and "some one (or more) of the number." Use the form
"someone else's."

1 In medical work more generally spelled "technic."

MANUAL OF STYLE: SPELLING

120. Differentiate between the terminations -ise and -ize
as follows:

SPELL WITH -IS6

advertise

compromise

excise

premise

advise

demise

exercise

reprise

affranchise

despise

exorcise

revise

apprise (to

devise

franchise

rise

inform)

disfranchise

improvise

supervise

arise

disguise

incise

surmise

chastise

emprise

manuprise

surprise

circumcise

enfranchise

merchandise

comprise

enterprise

SPELL WITH -ize (-yze)

aggrandize

dramatize

mercerize

revolutionize

agonize

economize

mesmerize

satirize

analyze

emphasize

metamorphize

scandalize

anatomize

energize

methodize

scrutinize

anglicize

epitomize

minimize

signalize

apologize

equalize

modernize

solemnize

apostrophize

eulogize

monopolize

soliloquize

apprize (to

evangelize

moralize

specialize

appraise)

extemporize

nationalize

spiritualize

authorize

familiarize

naturalize

standardize

autolyze

fertilize

neutralize

stigmatize

baptize

fossilize

organize

subsidize

brutalize

fraternize

ostracize

summarize

canonize

galvanize

oxidize

syllogize

catechize

generalize

paralyze

symbolize

catholicize

gormandize

particularize

sympathize

cauterize

harmonize

pasteurize

tantalize

centralize

hellenize

patronize

temporize

characterize

humanize

philosophize

tranquilize

Christianize

immortalize

plagiarize

tyrannize

civilize

italicize

polarize

utilize

classicize

jeopardize

professionalize

vaporize

colonize

legalize

protestantize

visualize

criticize

liberalize

pulverize

vitalize

crystallize

localize

realize

vocalize

demoralize

magnetize

recognize

vulcanize

deputize

manumize

reorganize

vulgarize

dogmatize

memorialize

50 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

PUNCTUATION

121. All punctuation marks should be printed in the same
style or font of type as the word, letter, or character
immediately preceding them:

"With the cry of Banzai! the regiment stormed the hill",
Luke 4:160; paragraph 2 (a); Botanical Gazette 20:144.

PERIOD

122. A period is used to indicate the end of a declarative
sentence (see 125).

123. a) Put a period after abbreviations:

Macmillan & Co., Mr. Smith, St. Paul, No. i, Chas. (see
93), ibid., s.v., ip mm., 1201 E. Main St., SE. J of SW. J,
T. 3 N., R. 69 W., Sec. n, middle of S. line, N.NE. (north
by northeast) .

V) Do not use a period after contractions cases
where a mechanical necessity compels the omission
of a letter or letters in the middle of a word for which
there is no recognized abbreviated form; such omis-
sion is indicated by an apostrophe:
m'f 'g pl't ( = manufacturing plant) ; 't isn't.
c) Treat the metric symbols as abbreviations, but
not the chemical symbols, nor the phrase "per
cent," nor the format of books:
O, Fe; 2 per cent (see 94); 4to, 8vo.

NOTE. With respect to symbols for measures the following
exceptions should be noted: Astrophysical Journal, 12 mm (with
thin space and no period) (but: 2 h 3 m 4 s ); Botanical Gazette,
i2mm., i25ft.,9cc. (on line, with period).

MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 51

But do not use a period, in technical matter, after the
recognized abbreviations for linguistic epochs, or
for titles of well-known publications of which the
initials only are given, nor after MS (= manuscript),
nor after Mme and Mile in French (see 92) :
IE (=Indo-European), OE (= Old English), MHG (=Middle
High German); AJSL (= American Journal of Semitic
Languages and Literatures), ZAW (=Zeitschrijt filr alttesta-
mentliche Wissenschaff), CIL (= Cor pus Inscriptionum Lati-
norum), PMLA (= Publications of the Modern Language
Association}.

124. Use no period after Roman numerals, even if having
the value of ordinals:

Vol. IV; Louis XVI was on the throne.

125. Omit the period after running-heads (for explanation
of this and the following terms see 279-83); after
centered headlines; after side-heads set in separate
lines; after cut-in heads; after box-heads in tables;
and after superscriptions and legends which do not
form a complete sentence (with subject and predi-
cate), or which do not make more than a single line
of type; after date lines at top of communications,
and after signatures (see 50) .

126. The period is always placed inside the quotation
marks; and inside the parentheses when the matter
inclosed is an independent sentence and forms no
part of the preceding sentence; otherwise outside:

Tennyson's "In Memoriam." Put the period inside the
quotation marks. (This is a rule without exception.) When
tie parentheses form part of the preceding sentence, put
the period outside (as, for instance, here).

52 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

EXCLAMATION POINT

127. The exclamation point is used to mark an outcry, or
an emphatic or ironical utterance:

"Long live the king!" "Heaven forbid!" "Good!" he
cried; "How funny this seems!" "This must not be!" The
subject of his lecture was "The Thisness of the That"! The
speaker went on: "Nobody should leave his home tomorrow
without a marked ballot in their (!) pocket."

128. The exclamation point is placed inside the quotation

marks or parentheses when part of the quotation
or parenthetical matter; otherwise outside.
See illustrations in 127.

INTERROGATION POINT

129. The interrogation point is used to mark a query, or
to express a doubt:

"Who is this ?" The prisoner gave his name as Roger Crown-
inshield, the son of an English baronet ( ?). Can the Bible
be applied to children ? is a question involved.

In Spanish the question mark is expressed before
as well as after the question, but the mark that
precedes is inverted.

Indirect questions should not be followed by an
interrogation point:
She asked whether he was ill.

A technically interrogative sentence disguised as
a question out of courtesy but actually embody-
ing a request does not need the interrogation
point:
Will you kindly sign and return the inclosed card.

MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 53

130. The interrogation point should be placed inside the
quotation marks or parentheses only when it is a
part of the quotation or parenthetical matter:

"Take hold, my son, of the toughest knots in life and try
to untie them; try to be worthy of man's highest estate;
have high, noble, manly honor. There is but one test of
everything, and that is, Is it right?" (Henry A. Wise).
The question: "Who is who, and what is what?" Were
you ever in "Tsintsinnati" ?

COLON

131. The colon is used to "mark a discontinuity of
grammatical construction greater than that indicated
by the semicolon and less than that indicated by the
period. It is commonly used (i) to emphasize a
close connection in thought between two clauses
each of which forms a complete sentence, and which
might with grammatical propriety be separated by
a period; (2) to separate a clause which is gram-
matically complete from a second which contains
an illustration or amplification of its meaning; (3)
to introduce a formal statement, an extract, a speech
in a dialogue, etc." (Century Dictionary] (unless
this is preceded by a conjunction, like "that,"
immediately connecting it with what goes before).
Before the quotation of a clause in the middle of a
sentence use a comma:

(i) "This argument undeniably contains some force: Thus
it is well known that . . ." "The secretion of the gland

54 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

goes on uninterruptedly: this may account for the condition
of the organ." "The fear of death is universal: even the
lowest animals instinctively shrink from annihilation." (2)
"Most countries have a national flower: France the lily,
England the rose, etc." "Lambert pine: the gigantic sugar
pine of California." (3) "The rule may be stated thus:
. . . ." "We quote from the address: . . . ." "Charles:
'Where are you going?' George: 'To the mill-pond.'"
But: "He stoutly maintained that 'the letter is a monstrous
forgery'"; and: "Declaring, 'The letter is a monstrous
forgery,' he tried to wash his hands of the whole affair."

132. The colon thus often takes the place of an implied
"namely," "as follows," "for instance," or a similar
phrase. Where such word or phrase is used, it
should be followed by a colon if what follows consists
of one or more grammatically complete clauses
(see 36) ; otherwise by a comma (see 145) :

"This is true of only two nations the wealthiest, though not
the largest, in Europe: Great Britain and France"; but:
"This is true of only two nations the wealthiest, though
not the largest, in Europe viz., Great Britain and France."
"He made several absurd statements. For example: ....";
but: "There are several states in the Union for instance,
Kansas and Wyoming which . . . ."

133. Put a colon after the salutatory phrase at the begin-
ning of a letter and after the introductory remark
of a speaker addressing the chairman or the audi-
ence:

MY DEAR MR. BROWN: (See 50.)

Mr. Chairman, Ladies and Gentlemen: (See 64.)

MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 55

134. Put a centered (g-unit) colon between chapter and
verse in Scripture passages, between hours and
minutes in time indications, and between volume
and page reference when such style is used:
Matt. 2:5-13; 4:30 P.M.; Botanical Gazette 20:144.

135. Put a colon between the place of publication and the
publisher's name in literary and bibliographical
references :

Clement of Alexandria (London: Macmillan), II, 97.

136. The colon should be placed outside the quotation
marks, unless a part of the quotation:

He writes under the head of "Notes and Comments":
" Many a man can testify to the truth of the old adage :" etc.

SEMICOLON

137. A semicolon is used to mark the division of a
sentence somewhat more independent than that
marked by a comma, or to separate complete
statements the argument of which is dependent
upon their remaining in the same sentence:

"Are we giving our lives to perpetuate the things that the
past has created for its needs, forgetting to ask whether these
things still serve today's needs; or are we thinking of living
men ?" "This is as important for science as it is for practice;
indeed, it may be said to be the only important consideration."
"It is so in war; it is so in the economic life; it cannot be
otherwise in religion." "In Persia the final decision rests with
the Shah, advised by his ministers; in most constitutional
countries, indirectly with the people as represented in parlia-
ment; in Switzerland alone, through the referendum, directly
with the electorate at large.'' "This, let it be remembered,

56 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

was the ground taken by Mill; for to him 'utilitarianism,'
in spite of all his critics may say, did not mean the pursuit of
bodily pleasure." ("For" in such cases should commonly be
preceded by a semicolon.)

138. In enumerations use a semicolon between the differ-
ent links, if these consist of more than a few words
closely connected, and especially if individual clauses
contain any punctuation mark of less value than a
period, or an exclamation or interrogation point
(unless inclosed in parentheses), yet are intimately
joined one with the other, and all with the sentence
or clause leading up to them, for instance through
dependence upon a conjunction, like "that," pre-
ceding them (see 36) :

"The membership of the international commission was made
up as follows: France, 4; Germany, 5; Great Britain, i
(owing to a misunderstanding, the announcement did not
reach the English societies in time to secure a full quota from
that country. Sir Henry Campbell, who had the matter in
charge, being absent at the time, great difficulty was experi-
enced in arousing sufficient interest to insure the sending of
even a solitary delegate); Italy, 3; the United States, 7."
"The defendant, in justification of his act, pleaded that (i)
he was despondent over the loss of his wife; (2) he was out
of work; (3) he had had nothing to eat for two days; (4) he
was under the influence of liquor." "Presidents Hadley, of
Yale; Eliot, of Harvard; Butler, of Columbia; and Angell,
of Michigan."

139. In Scripture references a semicolon is used to
separate passages containing chapters:

Gen. 2:3-6, 9, 14; 3:17; chap. 5; 6:15.

MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 57

140. The semicolon should be placed outside the quota-
tion marks or parentheses, unless a part of the
quotation or parenthetical matter.

COMMA

141. The comma is "used to indicate the smallest inter-
ruptions in continuity of thought or grammatical
construction, the marking of which contributes to
clearness" (Century Dictionary)'.

"Here, as in many other cases, what is sometimes popularly
supposed to be orthodox is really a heresy, an exaggeration,
a distortion, a caricature of the true doctrine of the church.
The doctrine is, indeed, laid down by an authority here and
there; but, speaking generally, it has no place in the stand-
ards, creeds, or confessions of the great communions; e.g.,
the Apostles' Creed, the Nicene Creed, the canons of the early
ecumenical councils, the Westminster Confession, the Thirty-
nine Articles." "Shakspere and other, lesser, poets." "The
books which I have read I herewith return" (i.e., I return
those [only] which I have read); but: "The books, which I
have read, I herewith return" (i.e., having read them [all],
I now return them). "Gossiping, women are happy"; and:
"Gossiping women are happy." "Of these four, two Ameri-
cans and one Englishman started"; and: "Of these, four
two Americans and two Englishmen started." "The suffer-
ing, God will relieve." "Behind, her 'stage mother' stood
fluttering with extra wraps." "Some boys and girls pre-
maturely announce themselves, usually in uncomfortable,
sometimes in bad, ways."

142. Use a comma to separate proper nouns belonging
to different individuals or places:

"To John, Smith was always kind"; "To America, Europe
awards the prize of mechanical skill."

58 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

143. Put a comma before "and," "or," and "nor"
connecting the last two links in a sequence of three
or more; or all the links in a series of greater length,
or where each individual link consists of several
words; always put a comma before "etc.":

Tom, Dick, and Harry; either copper, silver, or gold; "He
was equally familiar with Homer, and Shakspere, and
Moliere, and Cervantes, and Goethe, and Ibsen"; "Neither
France for her art, nor Germany for her army, nor England
for her democracy, etc."

But do not use a comma where "and," etc., serves
to connect all of the links in a brief and close-knit
phrase :

"a man good and noble and true"; "I do not remember who
wrote the stanza whether it was Shelley or Keats or Moore."

144. Ordinarily, put a comma before and after clauses in-
troduced by such conjunctions as "and," "but," "or,"
"if," "while," "as" (meaning "since"), "whereas,"
"since," "because," "when," "after," "although,"
etc., especially if a change of subject takes place:

"When he arrived at the railway station, the train had gone,
and his friend, who had come to bid him goodbye, had
departed, but left no word. As the next train was not due
for two hours, he decided to take a ride about the town,
although it offered little of interest to the sightseer. While
he regretted his failure to meet his friend, he did not go
to his house."

But do not use a comma before clauses introduced
by such conjunctions if the preceding clause is not

MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 59

logically complete without them; nor before "if,"
"but," and "though" in brief and close-welded
phrases:

"This is especially interesting because they represent the two
extremes and because they present differences in their rela-
tions"; "This is good because true"; "I shall agree to this
only if you accept my conditions"; "I would not if I could,
and could not if I would"; "honest though poor"; "a cheap
but valuable book."

145. Such conjunctions, adverbs, connective particles, or
phrases as "now," "then," "however," "indeed,"
"therefore," "moreover," "furthermore," "never-
theless," "though," "in fact," "in short," "for
instance," "that is," "of course," "on the contrary,"
"on the other hand," "after all," "to be sure,"
"for example," etc., may be followed by a comma
when standing at the beginning of a sentence or
clause to introduce an inference or an explanation,
and may be placed between commas when wedged
into the middle of a sentence or clause to mark off a
distinct break in the continuity of thought or struc-
ture, indicating a summarizing of what precedes,
the point of a new departure, or a modifying, restrict-
ive, or antithetical addition, etc. :

"Indeed, this was exactly the point of the argument";
"Moreover, he did not think it feasible"; "Now, the question
is this: . . . ." "Nevertheless, he consented to the scheme";
"In fact, rather thi reverse is true"; "This, then, is my
position: . . . ."; "The statement, therefore, cannot be
verified"; "He thought, however, that he would like to

60 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

try"; "That, after all, seemed a trivial matter"; "The
gentleman, of course, was wrong"; "A comma may be used
between clauses of a compound sentence that are connected
by a simple con junction, though a comma is emphatically not
used between clauses connected by a conjunctive adverb."

But do not use a comma with such words when the
connection is logically close and structurally smooth
enough not to call for any pause in reading; with
"therefore," "nevertheless," etc., when directly
following the verb; with "indeed" when directly
preceding or following an adjective or another
adverb which it qualifies; nor ordinarily with such
terms as "perhaps," "also," "likewise," etc.:

"Therefore I say unto you . . . ."; "He was therefore
unable to be present"; "It is nevertheless true"; "He is
recovering very slowly indeed"; "He was perhaps thinking
of the future"; "He was a scholar and a sportsman too."

146. A comma is preferably omitted before "rather" in
such an expression as

"The time-value is to be measured in this way rather than
by the time-equivalent of the strata."

147. If among several adjectives preceding a noun the
last bears a more direct relation to the noun than the
others, it should not be preceded by a comma:

"the admirable political institutions of the country"; "a hand-
some, wealthy young man."

148. Participial clauses, especially such as contain an
explanation of the main clause, should usually be
set off by a comma :

"Being asleep, he did not hear him"; "Exhausted by a day's
hard work, he slept like a stone."

MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 6 1

149. Put a comma before "not" introducing an anti-
thetical clause or phrase:

"Men addict themselves to inferior pleasures, not because
they deliberately prefer them, but because they are the only
ones to which they have access."

But do not use commas before such words when the
thought is incomplete without the following words.

150. For parenthetical, adverbial, or appositional clauses
or phrases use commas to indicate structurally
disconnected, but logically integral, interpolations;
dashes to indicate both structurally and logically
disconnected insertions ; never use the two together
(see 175):

"Since, from the naturalistic point of view, mental states are
the concomitants of physiological processes . . . ."; "The
French, generally speaking, are a nation of artists"; "The
English, highly democratic as they are, nevertheless deem
the nobility fundamental to their political and social systems."
"There was a time I forget the exact date when these
conditions were changed."

151. Use a comma to separate two identical or closely
similar words, even if the sense or grammatical con-
struction does not require such separation (see 142) :

"Whatever is, is good"; "What he was, is not known";
"The chief aim of academic striving ought not to be, to be
most in evidence "; "This is unique only in this, that . . . ."

152. In adjectival phrases a complementary, qualifying,
delimiting, or antithetical adjective added to the
main epithet preceding a noun should ordinarily be
preceded and followed by a comma:

62 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

"This harsh, though at the same time perfectly logical,
conclusion"; "The deceased was a stern and unapproach-
able, yet withal sympathetic and kind-hearted, gentleman " ;
"Here comes in the most responsible, because it is the final,
office of the teacher"; "The most sensitive, if not the most
elusive, part of the training of children"; "The better a
proverb is, the more trite it usually becomes."

153. Two or more co-ordinate clauses ending in a word
governing or modifying another word in a following
clause should be separated by commas :

". . . . a shallow body of water connected with, but well
protected from, the open sea"; "He was as tall as, though
much younger than, his brother"; "The cultivation in our-
selves of a sensitive feeling on the subject of veracity is one of
the most useful, and the enfeeblement of that feeling one of
the most hurtful, things"; "This road leads away from,
rather than toward, your destination."

154. Similarly, use a comma to separate two numbers:
"In 1905, 347 teachers attended the convention"; November
i, 1905. (See 160.)

155. A comma is employed to indicate the omission, for
brevity or convenience, of a word or words the
repetition of which is not essential to the meaning :
"In Illinois there are seventeen such institutions; in Ohio,
twenty-two; in Indiana, thirteen" ; "In Lincoln's first cabinet
Seward was secretary of state; Chase, of the treasury;
Cameron, of war; and Bates, attorney general."

Often, however, such constructions are smooth enough
not to call for commas (and consequent semicolons) :
"One puppy may resemble the father, another the mother,
and a third some distant ancestor."

MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 63

156. A direct quotation, maxim, or similar expression,
when brief, should be separated from the preceding
part of the sentence by a comma (see 131) :

" God said, Let there be light."

157. Use a comma before "of" in connection with resi-
dence or position:

Mr. and Mrs. Mclntyre, of Detroit, Mich.; President Hadley,
of Yale University.

Exceptions are those cases, historical and political, in
which the place-name practically has become a part
of the person's name, or is so closely connected with
this as to render the separation artificial or illogical:

Clement of Alexandria, Philip of Anjou, King Edward of
England.

158. In literary references insert a comma between con-
secutive numbers to represent a break in the con-
tinuity, a separate reference to each; an en dash, to
represent one continuous reference between the
consecutive numbers:

pp. 4, 7-8, 10; Ezra 5:7-8; IV, 123-30.

159. Put a comma after digits indicating thousands, 1
except in a date or in a page-reference and not
between the constituents of dimensions, weights,
and measures:

1,276, 10,419; 2200 B.C.; p. 2461; 3 feet 6 inches; 4 Ib.
2 oz. ; 2 hr. 4 min.

NOTE. Astrophysical Journal and Botanical Gazette do not
use a comma with four figures.

1 Except in German and in Spanish, where a period is used instead, as: 69.190.175 .

64 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

160. Separate month and year and similar time divisions
by a comma:

November, 1905 ; New Year's Day, 1906.

NOTE. Astrophysical Journal and Botanical Gazette do not
use a comma between month and year.

161. Omit the comma, in signatures and at the beginning
of articles, after author's name followed by address,
title, or position in a separate line, or after address
followed by a date line, etc. (see 65).

162. The comma is always placed inside the quotation
marks, but following the parenthesis, if the con-
text requires it at all.

APOSTROPHE

163. An apostrophe is used to mark the omission of a
letter or letters in the contraction of a word, or of
figures in a number. In the case of contractions
containing a verb and the negative, do not use space
between the two components of the contraction:

it's, ne'er, 'twas, "takin' me 'at"; m'f'g; the class of '96;
don't, haven't. (See 123.)

164. The possessive case of nouns, common and proper,
is formed by the addition of an apostrophe, or
apostrophe and 5 (see 113) :

a man's word, horses' tails; Scott's Ivanhoe, Jones's farms,
Themistodes' era; for appearance' sake.

165. The plural of numerals, and of rare or artificial noun-
coinages, is formed by the aid of an apostrophe and
s; of proper nouns of more than one syllable ending
in a sibilant, by adding an apostrophe alone (mono-

MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 65

syllabic proper names ending in a sibilant add es;
others, s) (see 101) :

in the i goo's; in two's and three's, the three R's, the
Y.M.C.A.'s; "these I-just-do-as-I-please's"; "all the Tommy
Atkins' of England" (but: the Rosses and the Macdougals);
the Pericles' and Socrates' of literature.

QUOTATION MARKS. (See section on "Quotations,"
74-91.)

DASHES

166. An em dash is used to denote "a sudden break,
stop, or transition in a sentence, or an abrupt change
in its construction, a long or significant pause, or
an unexpected or epigrammatic turn of sentiment"
(John Wilson) :

"Do we can we send out educated boys and girls from the
high school at eighteen ?" "The Platonic world of the static,
and the Hegelian world of process how great the contrast!"
" 'Process' that is the magic word of the modern period";
"To be or not to be that is the question"; "Christianity
found in the Roman Empire a civic life which was implicated
by a thousand roots with pagan faith and cultus a state
which offered little."

167. Use dashes (rarely parentheses see 177) for par-
enthetical clauses which are both logically and
structurally independent interpolations (see 150):

"This may be said to be but, never mind, we will pass over
that"; "There came a time let us say, for convenience, with
Herodotus and Thucydides when this attention to actions
was conscious and deliberate"; "If it be asked and in say-
ing this I but epitomize my whole contention why the
Mohammedan religion . . . ."

66 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

1 68. A clause added to lend emphasis to, or to explain or
expand, a word or phrase occurring in the main
clause, which word or phrase is then repeated,
should be introduced by a dash:

"To him they are more important as the sources for history
the history of events and ideas"; "Here we are face to face
with a new and difficult problem new and difficult, that is,
in the sense that . . . . "

169. Wherever a "namely" is implied before a paren-
thetical or complementary clause, a dash should
preferably be used (see 132) :

"These discoveries gunpowder, printing-press, compass,
and telescope were the weapons before which the old science
trembled"; "But here we are trenching upon another division
of our field the interpretation of New Testament books."

170. In sentences broken up into clauses, the final
summarizing clause should be preceded by a dash :

"Amos, with the idea that Jehovah is an upright judge
. . . . ; Hosea, whose Master hated injustice and falsehood
. . . . ; Isaiah, whose Lord would have mercy only on those
who relieved the widow and the fatherless these were the
spokesmen . . . '

171. a) A word or phrase set in a separate line and suc-
ceeded by paragraphs, at the beginning of each of
which it is implied, should be followed by a dash :

"I recommend

" i. That we kill him.

"2. That we flay him."

6) In French and in Spanish a dash is used before
a speech in direct discourse instead of quotation
marks before and after.

MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 67

172. A dash may be used in connection with side-heads,
whether "run in" or paragraphed:

2. The language of the New Testament. The lexicons
of Grimm-Thayer, Cremer, and others ....

NOTE. The above has been taken from ....

Biblical criticism in other denominations

A most interesting article appeared in the Expository
Times ....

173. Use a dash in place of the word "to" connecting
two words or numbers (see 158) :

May- July, 1906 (en dash); May i, 1905 November i, 1906
(em dash); pp. 3-7 (en dash); Luke 3:6 5:2 (em dash).

But if the word "from" precedes the first word or
number, do not use the dash instead of "to":

From May i to July i, 1906.

In connecting consecutive numbers omit hundreds
from the second number i.e., use only two figures
unless the first number ends in two ciphers, in
which case repeat; if the next to the last figure in
the first number is a cipher, do not repeat this in the
second number; but in citing dates B.C. always
repeat the hundreds (because representing a dimi-
nution, not an increase) (see 158) :

1880-95, PP- 1I 3~ 1 ^', 1900-1906, pp. 102-7; 387-324 B.C.

NOTE. The Astrophysical Journal and Botanical Gazette re-
peat the hundreds' 1880-1895, pp. 113-116.

68 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

174. Let a dash precede the reference (author, title of
work, or both) following a direct quotation, consisting
of at least one complete sentence, in footnotes or
cited independently in the text (see 85) :

1 "I felt an emotion of the moral sublime at beholding
such an instance of civic heroism." Thirty Years, I, 379.
The green grass is growing,

The morning wind is in it,
'Tis a tune worth the knowing
Though it change every minute.

Emerson, "To Ellen, at the South."

175. A dash should not ordinarily be used in connection
with any other point, except a period :

"DEAR SIR: I have the honor . . . ."; not: "DEAR SIR:
I have . . . ."; "This I say it with regret was not done";
not: "This, I say it with regret, was . . . ."

But in a sentence where a comma would be neces-
sary if the parenthetical clause set off by dashes
did not exist, the comma may be retained before
the first dash:

Darwin, the promulgator of the theory, though by no
means its only supporter is regarded today, etc.

And when the parenthetical clause set off by dashes
itself requires an interrogation or exclamation
point, such punctuation may be retained in con-
nection with the second dash:

Senator Blank shall we call him statesman or politician ?
introduced the bill; If the ship should sink which God
forbid! he will be a ruined man.

MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 69

PARENTHESES

176. Place between parentheses figures or letters used to
mark divisions in enumerations run into the text:

"The reasons for his resignation were three: (i) advanced
age, (2) failing health, (3) a desire to travel."

If such divisions are paragraphed, a single paren-
thesis is ordinarily used in connection with a lower-
case (italic) letter; a period, with figures and capital
(roman) letters. In syllabi, and matter of a similar
character, the following scheme of notation and
indention should ordinarily be adhered to:

A. Under the head of ....

I. Under ....

1. Under ....

a) Under ....

(1) Under ....

(a) Under ....

i) Under ....

ii) Under ....
(ft) Under ....

(2) Under ....

b) Under ....

2. Under ....

II. Under ....

B. Under the head of ....

177. Parentheses should not ordinarily be used for paren-
thetical clauses (see 150 and 167) unless confusion
might arise from the use of less distinctive marks, or

70 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

unless the content of the clause is wholly irrelevant
to the main argument:

"He meant I take this to be the (somewhat obscure) sense
of his speech that . . . ."; "The period thus inaugurated
(of which I shall speak at greater length in the next chapter)
was characterized by ...."; "The contention has been
made (op. cit.) that . . . ."

BRACKETS

178. Brackets are used (i) to inclose an explanation or
note, (2) to indicate an interpolation in a quotation,
(3) to rectify a mistake, (4) to supply an omission,
and (5) for parentheses within parentheses:

(1) ' [This was written before the publication of Spencer's
book. EDITOR.]

(2) "These [the free-silver Democrats] asserted that the
present artificial ratio can be maintained indefinitely."

(3) "As the Italian [Englishman] Dante Gabriel Ros-
[s]etti has said, . . . ."

(4) JohnRuskin. By Henry Carpenter. ["English Men
of Letters," III.] London: Black, 1900.

(5) Grote, the great historian of Greece (see his History,
I, 204 [second edition] ),....

179. Such phrases as "To be continued" at the end, and
"Continued from . . . ." at the beginning, of
articles, chapters, etc., should be placed between
brackets, centered, and set in italics (see 73) and in
type reduced in size in accordance with the rule
governing reductions (see 86) :

[Continued from p. 320]
[To be concluded]

MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 71

ELLIPSES

180. Ellipses are used to indicate the omission, from a
quotation, of one or more words not essential to
the idea which it is desired to convey, and also
to indicate illegible words, mutilations, and other
lacunae in a document, manuscript, or other mate-
rial which is quoted. For an ellipsis at the begin-
ning, in the middle, or at the end of a sentence four
periods, separated by a space (en quad), should
ordinarily be used, except in very narrow measures
(in French three only, with no space between).
If the preceding line ends in a point, this should
not be included in the four. Where a "whole para-
graph, or paragraphs, or, in poetry, a complete
line, or lines, are omitted, insert a full line of
periods, separated by em- or 2-em quads, according
to the length of the line. But the periods should not
extend beyond the length of the longest type-line:

The point . . . . is that the same forces .... are still

the undercurrents of every human life We may

never unravel the methods of the physical forces; .....
but ....

I think it worth giving you these details, because it is
a vague thing, though a perfectly true thing, to say that it
was by his genius that Alexander conquered the eastern
world.

His army, you know, was a small one. To carry a

vast number of men ....

"Aux armes! ... aux armes! ... les Prussiens!"

"Je n'ecris que ce que j'ai vu, entendu, senti ou eprouve

moi-me'me ... j'ai deja publie quelques petits ouvrages ..."

72 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

181. An ellipsis should be treated as a part of the citation;
consequently should be inclosed in the quotation
marks (see 178 [3]).

HYPHENS

182. A hyphen is placed at the end of a line the remainder
of the last word of which is carried to the next line
(see section on "Divisions") and between many
compound words. The modern tendency is in favor
of writing as one two words which, when united,
convey but one idea:

schoolroom, workshop, headquarters.

Thus far, however, this practice is only a tendency;
there are many compound words which are better
hyphenated than consolidated. The following
rules are designed to cover such cases, but it must
be remembered that they are not to be applied
in all cases, and that a certain degree of judgment
must be exercised in their use.

183. Hyphenate two or more words (except proper names
forming a unity in themselves) combined into one
adjective preceding a noun, or into one pronoun.

so-called Croesus, well-known author, first-class investment,
better-trained teachers, high-school course, half-dead horse,
much-mooted question, joint-stock company, English-speaking
peoples, nineteenth-century progress, white-rat serum, up-to-
date machinery, four-year-old boy, house-to-house canvass,
go-as-you-please fashion, deceased-wife's-sister bill; the
feeble-minded (person) ; but : New Testament times, Old
English spelling, an a priori argument.

MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 73

Do not hyphenate combinations of adverb and
adjective where no ambiguity could result:
an ever increasing flood.

Where one of the components contains more than

one word, an en dash should be used in place of a

hyphen:

New York-Chicago freight traffic, Norwegian-German-

Jewish immigrant.

But do not connect by a hyphen adjectives or par-
ticiples with adverbs ending in "-ly"; nor such
combinations as the foregoing when following the
noun, or qualifying a predicate:
highly developed species; a man well known in the neighbor-
hood; the fly-leaf, so called; "Her gown and carriage were
strictly up to date."

184. Hyphenate, as a rule, nouns formed by the combina-
tion of two nouns standing in objective relation to
each other that is, one of whose components is
derived from a transitive verb:

mind-reader, story-teller, fool-killer, office-holder, well-wisher,
property-owner; hero-worship, wood-turning, clay-modeling,
curriculum -making.

Exceptions are common and brief compounds, un-
wieldy formations, or compounds with a special
meaning:

lawgiver, taxpayer, proofreader, bookkeeper, stockholder,
freehand, schoolboy, schoolgirl (but: school man, to dis-
tinguish from the Schoolmen of the Middle Ages) ; encyclo-
pedia compiler; waterproof, concussionproof.

74 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

185. A present participle united (i) with a noun to forma
new noun with a meaning different from that which
would be conveyed by the two words taken separately,
(2) with a preposition used absolutely (i.e., not gov-
erning a following noun), to form a noun, may
properly take a hyphen :

boarding-house, dining-hall, sleeping-room, dwelling-place,
printing-office, walking-stick, starting-point, stepping-
stone, stumbling-block (but meeting place) ; lean-to.

186. As a general rule, compounds of "book," "house,"
"mill," "room," "shop," and "work" should be
printed as one compact word, without a hyphen,
when the prefixed noun contains only one syllable,
should be hyphenated when it contains two, and
should be printed as two separate words when it
contains three or more:

handbook, schoolbook, notebook, textbook; pocket-book,

story-book; reference book.

boathouse, clubhouse, schoolhouse, storehouse; engine-house,

power-house; business house.

commill, handmill, sawmill, windmill; water-mill, paper-mill;

chocolate mill.

bedroom, classroom, schoolroom, storeroom; lecture-room;

recitation room; but: drawing-room (sitting-room) ; drawing

room (for lessons) .

tinshop, workshop; bucket-shop, tailor-shop; policy shop;

handwork, woodwork; metal-work; filigree work.

Exceptions are rare combinations, and such as for
appearance' sake would better be separated:
wheat mill, school work, home work, class work, book
work, team work, source book.

MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 75

187. Compounds of "maker," "dealer," and other words
denoting occupation should ordinarily be hyphen-
ated; likewise nouns combined in an adjectival
sense before a proper noun:

harness-maker, book-dealer, (see 184); a soldier-statesman,
the poet-artist Rossetti. (Exceptions are a few short
words of everyday occurrence: bookmaker, dressmaker,
shopgirl.)

188. Compounds of "store" should be hyphenated when
the prefix contains only one syllable; otherwise not:

drug-store, feed-store (but: bookstore); grocery store, dry-
goods store.

189. Compounds of "fellow" are hyphenated when
forming the first element of the compound:

fellow-man, fellow-beings; but: playfellow; "Mr. Good-
fellow"; politics makes strange bedfellows.

190. Compounds of "father," "mother," "brother,"
"sister," "daughter," "parent," and "foster" should
be hyphenated when forming the first element of
the compound:

father-love (but: fatherland), mother- tongue, brother-officer,
sister-nation, foster-son, daughter-cells, parent-word.

191. Compounds of "great," indicating the fourth degree
in a direct line of descent, call for a hyphen:
great-grandfather, great-grandson.

1 92. Compounds of " life " and " world " require a hyphen :

life-history, life-principle (but: lifetime), world-power, world-
problem.

76 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

193. Compounds of "skin" with words of one syllable
are to be printed as one word; with words of more
than one, as two separate words:

calfskin, sheepskin; alligator skin.

194. Compounds of "master" should be hyphenated:
master-builder, master-stroke (exception: masterpiece).

195. Compounds of "god," when this word forms
the second element of the compound, should be
hyphenated:

sun-god, rain-god (but: godsend, godson).

196. "Half," "quarter," etc., combined with a noun
should be followed by a hyphen:

half-truth, half- tone; half-year, half-title, quarter-mile; but
not the adverb "halfway."

197. "Semi-," "demi-," "bi-," "tri-," etc., do not ordina-
rily demand a hyphen, unless followed by i, w, or y:

semiannual, demigod, bipartisan, bichromate, bimetallist,
trimonthly, tricolor, trifoliate, semi-incandescent, bi-
weekly, tri-yearly.

Exceptions are long or unusual formations:
semi-barbarous, semi-translucent.

198. Compounds of "self," when this word forms the
first element of the compound, are hyphenated:
self-evident, self-respect.

199. Combinations with "fold" are to be printed as one
word if the number contains only one syllable; if it
contains more, as two:

twofold, tenfold; fifteen fold, a hundred fold.

MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 77

200. Adjectives formed by the suffixation of "like" to
a noun are usually printed as one word if the noun
contains only one syllable (except when ending in
/); if it contains more (or is a proper noun), they
should be hyphenated:

childlike, homelike, warlike, godlike; eel-like, bell-like;
woman-like, business-like; American -like (but: Christlike).

201. "Vice," "ex-," "elect," and "general," constituting
parts of titles, should be connected with the chief
noun by a hyphen:

Vice-Consul Taylor, ex-President Cleveland, the governor-
elect, the postmaster-general. (But do not hyphenate mili-
tary terms such as: surgeon general, lieutenant general.)

202 . Compounds of "by-," when this word forms the first
element of the compound, should be hyphenated:
by-product, by-laws (but: bygones).

203. The prefixes " co-," " pre-," and " re-," when followed
by the same vowel as that in which they terminate,
or by w or y, or by any letter that forms a diph-
thong with the last letter of the prefix, except in
very common words, take a hyphen; but, as a rule,
they do not when followed by a different vowel or
by a consonant, except to avoid mispronunciation :

co-operation, pre-empted, re-enter, co-worker, re-yield;
but: coequal, coeducation, prearranged, reinstal; cohabita-
tion, prehistoric, recast (but: re-use, re-read, co-author).
NOTE. The Botanical Gazette prints: cooperate, reenter, etc.

Exceptions are combinations with proper names, long
or unusual formations, and words in which the

78 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

omission of the hyphen would convey a meaning
different from that intended (cf . 9, 19, 208) :

pre-Raphaelite, re-democratize, re-pulverization; re-cover
( = cover again), re-creation, re-formation (as distinguished
from reformation).

204. Omit the hyphen from "today," "tomorrow,"
"tonight," "viewpoint," "standpoint." (See 119,
note.)

205. The negative particles "un-," "in-," "il-," "im-,"
and "a-" do not usually require a hyphen:

unmanly, undemocratic, inanimate, indeterminate, illimitable,
impersonal, asymmetrical.

Exceptions would be rare and artificial combinations.
The particle "non-," on the contrary, ordinarily calls
for a hyphen, except in the commonest words:

non-aesthetic, non-subservient, non-contagious, non-ability,
non-interference, non-evolutionary, non-membership, non-
unionist; but: nonage, nondescript, nonessential, nonplus,
nonsense, noncombatant.

206. " Quasi-" prefixed to a noun or an adjective requires
a hyphen:

quasi-corporation, quasi-historical.

207. "Over" and "under" prefixed to a word should not
be followed by a hyphen, except in unusual cases:

overbold, overemphasize, overweight, underfed, underestimate,
undersecretary; but: over-soul, under-man, over-spiritualistic.

208. The Latin prepositions "ante," "infra," "inter,"
"intra," "post," "sub," "super," and "supra,"
and the Greek preposition "anti" prefixed to a

MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 79

word do not ordinarily require a hyphen, unless fol-
lowed by the letter with which they terminate, or,
in the case of those prefixes ending in a vowel,
by -w, by -y, or by a vowel which would form a
diphthong in conjunction with the terminal letter:

antedate, antechamber, antediluvian, inframarginal, inter-
national, interstate, intercity, intramural, postscript, post-
graduate, postprandial, subconscious, submarine, subtitle,
subway, superfine, supraliminal, antidote, antiseptic (but:
anti-imperialistic cf. 203), intra-atomic, ante-war, intra-
yearly, ante-urban, anti-eclectic.

Exceptions are such formations as

ante-bellum, ante-Nicene, anti-Semitic, inter-university, post-
revolutionary.

209. "Extra," "pan," and "ultra" as a rule call for a
hyphen :

extra-hazardous, pan -Hellenic, ultra-conservative (but:
extraordinary, Ultramontane).

210. In fractional numbers, spelled out, connect by a
hyphen the numerator and the denominator, unless
either already contains a hyphen:

"The year is two-thirds gone"; four and five-sevenths;
thirty one-hundredths; but: thirty-one hundredths.

But do not hyphenate in such cases as

"One half of his fortune he bequeathed to his widow; the
other, to charitable institutions."

211. In the case of two or more compound words occurring
together, which have one of their component elements

8o THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

in common, this element is frequently omitted from
all but the last word, and its implication should be
indicated by a hyphen :

in English- and Spanish-speaking countries; one-, five-, and
ten-cent pieces; "If the student thinks to find this character
where many a literary critic is searching in fifth- and tenth-
century Europe he must not look outside of manuscript tra-
dition."

NOTE. Some writers regard this hyphen as an objectionable
Teutonism.

212. A hyphen is used to indicate a prefix or a suffix, as a
particle or syllable, not complete in itself:

"The prefix a-"; "The Spanish diminutive suffixes -ito
and -cita.

213. A hyphen is employed to indicate the syllables of a
word:

di-a-gram, pho-tog-ra-phy.

214. Following is a list of words of everyday occurrence
which should be hyphenated, and which do not fall
under any of the foregoing classifications :

after-years death-rate
anti-trust first-fruits
bas-relief folk-song
birth-rate horse-power
blood-feud ice-cream
blood-relations loan-word
coat-of-arms man-of-war
cross-reference mid-year

object-lesson title-page
page-proof trade-mark
pay-roll wave-length
poor-law well-being
sea-level well-nigh
sense-perception well-wisher
subject-matter will-power
thought-process

Otherwise Webster's Dictionary is standard for :

bedrock Nonconformist trade unions

farm land Pan-German un-Christian

grown-ups sledge hammer word formation

live stock standing room workingman

MANUAL OF STYLE: DIVISIONS 8 1

DIVISIONS

215. Avoid all unnecessary divisions of words. Wherever
consistent with good spacing, carry the whole word
over into the next line.

216. Do not, in wide measures (20 ems or more), divide
on a syllable of two letters, if possible to avoid it.
Never carry over a syllable of two letters. Good
spacing, however, is paramount. Words of four
letters like on-ly should never be divided; words
of five or six like oc-cur, of-fice, let-ter rarely.

217. Never let more than two consecutive lines termi-
nate in a hyphen, if at all avoidable. The next to
the last line in a paragraph ought not to end in a
divided word; and the last line (the "breakline")
should, in measures of 15 ems and up, contain at
least four letters. Similarly, try to avoid a divided
word at the bottom of a right-hand (recto) page.

218. Do not divide proper nouns, especially names of
persons, unless absolutely necessary.

219. Do not separate (i.e., put in different lines) the
initials of a name, or such combinations as 1496 A.D.,
6:00 P.M., 6 43. 6d.

220. Avoid the separation of a divisional mark, e.g., (a)
or (i), in the middle of a sentence, from the section

82 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

which it precedes; i.e., do not allow such mark to
fall at the end of a line, but carry it over with the
matter to which it pertains.

221. Divide according to pronunciation (the American
system), not according to derivation (the English
system) :

democ-racy, not: demo-cracy; knowl-edge, not: know-ledge;
aurif-erous, not: auri-ferous; antip-odes (still better: antipo-
des see 224), not: anti-podes.

As far as is compatible with pronunciation and good
spacing, however, divide compounds on etymologi-
cal lines, or according to derivation and meaning:

dis-pleasure is better than displeas-ure; school-master,
than schoolmas-ter; never: passo-ver, une-ven, etc.

Never divide on a syllable with a silent vowel,

such as:

possi-ble, vex-ed, enti-tled, princi-ples.

222. When two consonants meet between vowels, and
the syllable ends on one consonant, the division
may properly be made between the consonants, the
pronunciation determining the place of division:

advan-tage, exces-sive, finan-cier, foun-da-tion, impor-tant,
In-dian, moun-tain, profes-sor, struc-ture.

223. Do not terminate a line in a soft c or g y or in a j.
Escape the division entirely, if possible; if not pos-
sible, divide:

pro-cess, not: proc-ess; ne-cessary, not: nec-essary; spa-
cing, not: spac-ing (the rule being that in present parti-

MANUAL OF STYLE: DIVISIONS 83

ciples the -ing should be carried over); pro-geny, not:
prog-eny; pre-judice, not: prej-udice.

NOTE. This rule differs from that followed by Webster and
other dictionaries.

224. Divide on a vowel wherever practicable. In case a
vowel alone forms a syllable in the middle of a word,
run it into the first line:

sepa-rate, not: sep-arate; particu-lar, not: partic-ular;
criti-cism, not: crit-icism.

Exceptions are words in -able and -ible, which should

carry the vowel over into the next line:

read-able, not: reada-ble; convert-ible, not: converti-ble.

225. In hyphenated nouns and adjectives avoid additional
hyphens:

object-lesson, not: object-les-son; fellow-being, not: fel-
low-being; poverty-stricken, not: pov-erty-stricken, much
less: pover-ty-stricken.

226. A coalition of two vowel-sounds into one (i.e., a
diphthong) should be treated as one letter. There-
fore do not divide:

peo-ple (either syllable makes a bad division), Cae-sar
(cf. 218), bu-ilding.

227. In derivatives from words ending in t, the t, in
divisions, should be carried into the next line with
the suffix if the accent has been shifted; if the deriva-
tive has retained the accent of the parent-word,
the / should be left in the first line :

objec-tive (from ob'ject); defect-ive (from defect'); but:
respec-tively, distinc-tive.

84 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

228. The addition of a plural s, adding a new syllable
to words ending in an s-sound, does not create a
new excuse for dividing such words:

hor-ses and circumstan-ces are impossible divisions.

229. Adjectives in -ical should be divided on the i:
physi-cal, not phys-ical nor physic-al.

230. Do not divide nothing.

231. The following are condensed rules for dividing
words in the foreign languages most frequently met
with in proofreading. While perhaps not entirely
comprehensive, they will be found to cover every
ordinary contingency.

FRENCH

a) The fundamental principle is to divide on a
vowel as far as possible, avoiding consonantal end-
ing of syllables:

in-di-vi-si-bi-li-te, a-che-ter; ta-bleau (not: tab-leau);
ba-lancer (not: bal-ancer).

6) Two consonants of which the second is / or r
(but not the combinations rl, Ir), are both carried
over to the following syllable:

ta-bleau, e"-cri-vain, per-dre, qua-tre; par-ler, hur-ler.

c) There are as many syllables as there are vowels,

even if soundless:

par-lent, vic-toi-re, pro-pri-e'-tai-re, guer-re, fil-les;

MANUAL OF STYLE: DIVISIONS 85

but a mute e following a vowel does not form a

syllable:

e-taient, joue-rai;

and i, y, o, ou, u, when preceding other vowels, are

often sounded as consonants, and then do not form

a syllable:

bien, 6-tions, yeux, loin, fouet-ter, 6-cuel-le.

GERMAN

a) The fundamental principle is to divide on a
vowel as far as possible:

hii-ten, le-ben, Fa-brik.

b) If several consonants stand between vowels,
usually only the last is carried over:

Rit-ter, klir-ren, Klemp-ner, Ver-wand-te, Karp-fen.

c) sz, ch, sch, ph, st, th are never separated (but see
(/) below):

Bu-sze, Be-cher, Ha-scher (but: Haus-chen), Geo-gra-phie,
La-sten, Ma-thilde.

d) If ck must be divided, it is separated into k-k:
Deckel Dek-kel.

e) In foreign words (Fremdivorter) , combinations of
b, d, g, k, p, t, with I or r are carried over:
Pu-bli-kum, Me-trum, Hy-drant.

/) Compound words are separated first into their
component elements, and within each element the
foregoing rules apply:
Fursten-schlosz, Tur-an-gel, Inter-esse.

86 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

ITALIAN

a) The fundamental principle is to divide on a
vowel as far as possible:

ta-vo-li-no, nar-ra-re.

b) s before a consonant, r following a consonant,
ch, gh, gli (gl), gn, qu, sc, d, fl, gl, pi are never
separated:

ca-sti-ghi, a-vro, mi-gli6-re, bi-so-gno, in-chi6-stro, u-scire.

c) i=y and u=w go with the following vowel;
ac, au, ei, eu, oi are not separated:

miei, tuoi.

SPANISH

a) The fundamental principle is to divide on a
vowel as far as possible:

ca-ra-co-les, re-ba-no, fle-xi-bi-li-dad.

b) br, bl, ch, cl, cr, dr, II, pr, rr, tr, and n, being
regarded as simple consonants, follow the fore-
going rule; cc and nn are divided, as in English:
mu-cha-cho, ba-ta-lla, bu-116, ba-rre-rio, ci-ga-rro; ac-ce-so,
en-no-ble-cer, in-ne-ga-ble.

c) The liquid consonants / and r, when preceded by
any consonant other than s, must not be separated
from that consonant, except in uniting parts of
compound words:

ha-blar, po-dria, ce-le-bra-ci-on, si-glo; but sub-lu-nar,
sub-ra-yar, es-la-bon.

d} Two separable consonants should be divided;
5 is always disjoined from a following consonant:
cuer-da, chas-co, pron-to; has-ta, as-pi-rar, cons-pi-rar.

MANUAL OF STYLE: DIVISIONS 87

GREEK

a) Single consonants, combinations of consonants
which can begin a word, and mutes followed by p
or v are placed at the beginning of a syllable:

-^o), e-yw, e-OTre-pa, ve'-Krap, d-K/x,?7, Se-oytds, /ni-xpov, Trpa-
y/ia-Tos, yi-yvd>-<rKw.

Other combinations of consonants are divided:

irpacr-crw, eA-7rts, v-8ov, ap-/ta-Ta.

6) Compound words are divided into their original
parts; subject to that the foregoing rule applies:

7rpo<r-a-y<i>, 7rap-a-yw.

LATIN

a) A Latin word has as many syllables as it has
vowels or diphthongs (ae, au, oe, ei, eu, ui).

b) When a single consonant occurs between two
vowels, divide before the consonant:

Cae-sar, me-ri-di-es.

c) In the case of two or more consonants divide
before the last consonant, except in the combina-
tions: mute (p, ph, b, t, th, d, c, ch, g)+liquid (/, r),
and qu or gu:

om-nis, scrip-tus, cunc-tus (but: pa-tris, e-quus, lin-gua).

d) Compound words are separated first into their
component elements, and within each element the
foregoing rules apply:

ad-est, ab-rum-po, red-e-o, trans-i-go.

88 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

FOOTNOTES

232. For reference indexes, as a rule, use superior figures.
Only in special cases should asterisks, daggers, etc.,
be employed (see 234); for instance, in tabular or
algebraic matter, where figures would be likely to
cause confusion. Index figures in the text should be
placed after the punctuation marks, without space,
except in German, where they are placed inside:

.... the niceties of style which were then invading Attic
prose, 1 and which made ....

1 In particular the avoidance of hiatus.
p^y+jt*

* Schenk's equation.

When figures are not used, the sequence of indexes
should be:

* ("asterisk" or "star"), f ("dagger"), % ("double dagger"),
("section mark"), || ("parallels"), ^ ("paragraph mark").

233. Where references to the same work follow each
other closely and uninterruptedly, use ibid, instead
of repeating the title. Thus ibid, takes the place
of as much of the previous reference as is repeated:

Spencer, Principles of Sociology, chap, iv., p. 128.

Ibid., p. 129.

Barnes, "Charles Stunner," Jour, of Pol. Econ., XXXV, 427.

Ibid., p. 435-

Ibid, should, however, not ordinarily be used for
the first footnote on a verso (left-hand) page; it is

MANUAL OF STYLE: FOOTNOTES 89

better usage either to repeat the title or, if the
reference is to the whole citation, to use loc. cit.
(the place cited) or op. cit. (the work cited) or
a.a.O. (am angezeigten Orte) in German:

'Smith, Wealth of Nations, p. 289.

3 Loc. cit. (on verso page if exactly the same place is cited), or

3 Smith, op. cit., p. 290.

However op. cit. is not used to repeat the title of a
journal, but it may be used to refer to an author's
work in a periodical and should not be used with-
out the author's name clearly in text or footnote.

234. Footnotes to tables, whether the tables are ruled or
open, should be in 6 pt, and should invariably be
placed at the foot of the table and not at the foot of
the page. For reference indexes in such cases use
asterisks, etc., and not superior figures (see 232).

235. If the author's name is given in the text in connec-
tion with a reference to, or a quotation from, his
work, it should not be repeated in the footnote:

.... This theory is questioned by Herbert, as follows-
"I cannot admit . . . ."'

1 Laws of the Ancients, 1, 153.

236. It is better to place the index figure in the text at
the end of the quotation (see illustration above).

237. Ordinarily, omit "Vol.," "chap.," and "p." in paren-

thetical or footnote references to particular pas-
sages. Use Roman numerals (capitals) for Volume,

90 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

Book, Part, Division, except in reference to ancient
classical works, when lower-case roman numerals
should be used; Roman numerals (lower-case) for
chapter and pages of introductory matter (Preface,
etc.) ; and Arabic numerals for number (Heft) and
text pages. Only when confusion would be liable
to arise, use " Vol.," "p.," etc., in connection with the
numerals; but where the reference is to a page, un-
accompanied by further details, the abbreviation
"p." or "pp." must of course be used. In text
matter, not parenthetical, spell out chapter, verse,
page, line, note, figure, etc. In classical references
use no comma between author's name and the title
of his work, and no comma following the title, unless
"Vol.," "p.," or some kindred symbol is used. In
all references to divisions of classical or ancient
works use periods in place of commas, reserving the
comma to indicate a succession (of pages, etc.) :

1 Miller, French Rev. (ad ed.; London: Abrahams, 1888),
II, Part IV, iii.

* S. I. Curtiss, "The Place of Sacrifice among Primitive
Semites," Biblical World, XXI (1903), 248 ff.

JP. 63; pp. 27-36.

* Cicero De officiis i. 133, 140.
*De div. per somn. i, p. 4630.

'Fraser, The Golden Bough*, I, 27 [superior figure within
punctuation indicating number of the edition].

The same practice prescribed for classical references
is frequently desired by authors with respect to
English references, and may with equal propriety
be followed:

MANUAL OF STYLE: FOOTNOTES 91

1 W. W. Greg Pastoral Poetry and Pastoral Drama (London
1906) 114.

238. The date of publication in a reference to a periodical
should be put in parentheses immediately following
the volume number:

1 Barnes, "Lester Frank Ward," Amer. Jour, of Social., XXV
(1919), 89.

If the citation is to month, year, and page only, the
date may appear in its natural order with commas:

3 "Problems of Reconstruction," Journal of Political Economy,
May, 1919, p. 89.

239. In work set on the linotype machine, footnotes should
be renumbered consecutively through each article,
in a journal, or through each chapter, in a book,
to save resetting in case of change (see "Hints to
Authors and Editors," note under "Footnotes,"
p. 122).

NOTE. Exceptions to these rules are footnotes in the Botani-
cal Gazette and the Astrophysical Journal, which have adopted
the following styles:

Botanical Gazette

1 LIVINGSTON, B. E., (i) On the nature of the stimulus which
causes the change in form of polymorphic green algae. BOT.
GAZ. 30:289-317. 1900.

3 , (2) The heredity of sex. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool.

40:187-218. 1903.

Astrophysical Journal

1 " Revision of Wolf's Sun-Spot Relative Numbers," Monthly
Weather Review, 30, 171, 1902.

3 Astrophysical Journal, 10, 333, 1899.

Botanical Gazette numbers its footnotes consecutively through-
out an article; all the other journals of the University of Chicago
Press number their footnotes from i up on each page, except
in special cases.

92 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

INDEXING

240. In indexes of proper names and other similar
alphabetical lists the following rules should be
observed :

a) Names beginning with M', Me, Mac, or St.,
Ste., whether the following letter is capitalized or
not, should be listed as if the prefix were spelled
Mac, Saint, Sainte, thus making it unnecessary
for one who consults the index to look in several
places to make sure of rinding the name sought:

Machiavelli St. Louis

M'Intyre, Henry Sainte Beuve

Mclntyre, James Salt Lake City

Maclntyre, Thomas
Mack, Joseph

&) Compound names should be listed under the
first part of the name. List the other parts of
the names in their respective alphabetical positions
and give a cross-reference to the first:

Campbell-Bannerman, Sir Henry

Stratton-Porter, Gene

Watts-Dunton, Theodore

Porter, Stratton, Gene. See Stratton-Porter

On the other hand, in the case of hyphenated
names gratuitously adopted, as in the case of
married women adding the maiden name to the
married name, the name preceding the hyphen
may be disregarded, and listing should be under

MANUAL OF STYLE: INDEXING 93

the letter of the true name, with a cross-reference
under the name preceding the hyphen.
c) Names with prefixes should be listed under the
part following the prefix, except (i) in English
(see b above); (ii) in French when the prefix
consists of or contains the article; (iii) in Italian
and Spanish when the prefix consists simply of the
article; (iv) in Dutch, the "Van," "Ten," etc., being
always capitalized (see 3, note); (v) when the
prefix and the name are written as one word.
Naturalized names with prefixes should be treated
according to the rules for the language adopted.

Hoffman, von; Lima, de; Ponte e Horto, da; Santos

Pereira Jardin, dos.

English: A Becket; De Quincey; De Morgan; D 'Israeli;

MacDonald; Van Buren.

French: DuMoncel; La Rochefoucauld ; LeSage; DuPin;

Du Bocage; but: Rosny, de; Bouille, de; Allard, de.

Italian and Spanish: La Lumia; La Farina; Lo Gatto;

but: Farina, da; Rio, del; Torre, della.

Prefix compounded with the name: Vanderkinde, Zurlauben,

Dechambre, Vanderhoeck, Delacroix.

In the case of the exceptions above noted the
first letter of the prefix governs the alphabetical
position of the name.

d} Names spelled with the umlaut a, o, ii should
be listed as if the umlaut were spelled out ae,oe, ue:

Miiller, A.
Mufola, C.
Muller, B.

94 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

e) Names having two parts, or names of firms,
connected by "and," "&," "y" (Spanish), "et"
(French), "und" (German), or "e" (Italian),
should be listed according to the first letter of the
name preceding the connective: Smith & Evans
(under "S"); Gomez y Pineda (under "G");
Loubet et Meunier (under "L"); Duncker und
Humblot (under "D"); Sandrone e Vallardi
(under "S"). ,

/) On the subject of cross-references see 62.
g) In indexing general terms the alphabetical ar-
rangement of subdivisions is much more useful
than the numerical order of page numbers; but in
so arranging such material only the first principal
word should be taken, i.e., adjective, noun, verb,
adverb, not the article, conjunction, or preposition:

Numbers: beginning a sentence, 73; in connected groups, how
treated, 73; consecutive treatment of, 113, 119; round, treat
ment of, 73; use of dash in consecutive, 119.

ti) Indexes are usually set in 6 or 8 pt. double
column, allowing i pica between columns. Entries
are separated by extra leads. Matter is usually
set flush and hang i em with solid runovers.

MANUAL OF STYLE: TABULAR WORK 95

TABULAR WORK

241. In n-pt. and zo-pt. matter open (unruled) tables
should ordinarily be set in 9 pt. leaded; ruled, in
8 pt. solid. In 9-pt. matter both open and ruled
tables should be set in 8 pt. solid. In 8-pt. matter
open tables should be set in 6 pt. leaded; ruled, in
6 pt. solid. In 6-pt. matter both open and ruled
tables should be set in 6 pt. solid. For columns
representing totals, averages, percentages, and
generalizations italic and black-face figures may
be used if desired to set off the various classes of
results. (See Table III, p. 100.)

242. Captions for the columns of open tables and box-
heads for ruled tables should ordinarily be set in
6 pt. Box-heads of open tables should be 6-pt. caps
and lower case unless subheads are used, in which
case caps and small caps are used for the upper
head (see Table III, p. 100). In ruled tables with
box-heads of several stories the upper story pri-
mary heads should be set in caps and small caps,
except where the second story consists of figures
only (see Table I, p. 98) ; the lower secondary in
caps and lower case. Wherever small caps are
used in box-heads, the heading for the "stub" (i.e.,
first column) should, as a rule, also be set in caps
and small caps.

96 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

243. In ruled tables there should be at least two leads'
space between the horizontal rules and the matter
inclosed, and, if practicable, at least the equivalent
of an en quad, of the type in which the body of
the table is set, between the perpendicular rules and
the matter inclosed.

244. In open tables either periods, one em apart and
aligned, or leaders, may be used between the col-
umns (see 248). In ruled tables, in the "stub,"
leaders should usually be employed, if there is room,
except in case the stub runs over and a brace is
necessary. (A leader is a piece of type, having dots
["period leader"] or short lines ["hyphen leader"]
upon its face, used in tables, indexes, etc., to
lead the eye across a space to the right word or
number.) An en leader is used instead of a
decimal point in tables.

245. In ruled columns of figures, to express a blank use
leaders across the full width of the column. Cen-
ter the figures in the column; if they cannot be put
in the exact center, and there is an unequal number
of digits in the groups, leave more space on the left
than on the right. All decimals and dollar signs
or other concrete values should be aligned.

246. When there is reading-matter in the columns of a
ruled table, it should be centered, if possible; if any
line runs over, use hanging indention, and align all
on the left.

MANUAL OF STYLE: TABULAR WORK 97

247. Double rules should be used at the top of all tables,
but perpendicularly, as a usual thing, only when a
table is doubled up on itself and the stub is re-
peated. (See Table IV, p. 100.) In continued
broadside tables, where the heading is not repeated
use a single rule only. Repeat heading on each
even page.

248. Tables of two columns only should be set open;
of three or more, ruled, except in such a case as
the table on page 99. All continuations of tables
should be of the same dimensions, even if blank
columns are necessary, and tables with identical
headings should stand parallel.

249. "Table I," etc., in headlines of tables should ordi-
narily be set in caps of the type in which the body of
the table is set and should not exceed the width of
the table; the following (descriptive) line, if any,
should be set in caps and small caps of the same
type. A single descriptive headline, not pre-
ceded by the number of the table, should be set
in caps of the type in which the table is set. A
footnote to the table should be set in 6 pt. with a
paragraph indention, and should not exceed the
width of the table. But when 6-pt. and 8-pt. ruled
tables are both used in the same work, use 8-pt.
headings over all tables (see 234). When tables
containing footnotes run over several pages, it is
necessary to repeat the footnotes on each even page.

98 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

250. Specimen tables for illustration:

TABLE I
DISTRIBUTION OF STARS IN EIGHT CLUSTERS

Plate (Exp.)

Ring

Sectors

Mean

165

195

N.G.C. 5024, MESSIER 53

fo*..

2/1/1

?25

385

^84

362

376

S7O

102 (ISO"")..

200

182

189

200

196

III. . . .

100

106

N.G.C. 5272, MESSIER 3

fo*..

4CQ

466

4.2

64 (5 m )

III. . . .

[IV

669

680

168

IC2

137

177

6s(iS m )---

III. . . .

[IV

* Radius of central area .05.

SPACES BETWEEN NINE-UNIT LEADERS
(For Eight Point)

Nine-unit leaders with one en between

With one em between

With one and one-half ems between

With two ems between .

MANUAL OF STYLE: TABULAR WORK

(For Nine Point)
Leaders with one en between

With one em between ....

With one and one-half ems between

With two ems between .

THICKNESS

TOTAL

THICKNESS

No.

Feet

Inches

Feet Inches

8. One layer of gray limestone . . .

2 9

7. Layer similar to one above. . . .

6 9

6. Massive light-gray layer. No

fossils noted

4 7

5. Shale parting

" . /

I 7

4. Grayish limestone

i 6

3. Bluish shales

o o

2. Limestone, hard and fossiliferous

8 6

i. Gravish to bluish shales. .

3 2

TABLE II Continued

Method

No. Stars

I. From variable stars

o" 00008

II. From Kapteyn's luminosity-curves:

C.I. 0.39 to O.2O

.000005

" <-0 10

.000007

" (Pv. mag. < 15. 30)....
" o. 10 to o.oi

.000009
.00003

All colors

.00005

49 c

III. From Russell's data for absolute mag-
nitude:
C.I. < o.io

.00005

All colors

oToooio

495

Provisionally adopted mean

oToooo3

ioo THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

TABLE III

DISTRICT

MEMBERS OF
FAMILY GROUPS

LODGERS

TOTAL

Number

Percentage

Number

Percentage

Stockyards . . .
Jewish

6,348
8i3
1,183
12,657
2,249

73
79
95
96

2,383
220

27
21

8,731
1,033

Bohemian ....
Polish

574
835

4
27

13,231
3,094

Italian

TABLE IV

Brine*

Sea-Waterf

Brine*

Sea-W ater

K. .

1 . 37

I. II

HCO 3 . .

O. 2O

24.00

20. ?o

ee.Qe

ec . 20

2 O2

i . 20

Br .

O O4

O. IQ

Mg..

O. ?'?

-I.TI

Nil

o.o?

Al
SO 4

O.OI

4.88

7.60

Percentage
of salin-

CO,

Nil

O.2I

ity . .

7.20

3.3O

* From Salt Creek, Salt Point Peninsula, Lake Winnipegosis. Professor
M. A. Parker, analyst.

t Mean of 77 analyses by W. Dittmar.

SECOND YEAR

Electives
(Two to be taken)

Latin

Modern History ....

German

French

Cooking or Sewing
Music and Drawing .
Public Speaking ....
Stenography

Periods

5
IO

3
10

MANUAL OF STYLE: TABULAR WORK

101

TABLE V

MEAN ANOMALIES

CHARACTER OF STATIONS

With Regard to Sign

Without Regard to Sign

Hayford;
Depth,
113.7 km.

Bouguer

Hayford;
Depth,
113.7 km.

Bouguer

0.009
.001

.001
.003
+ .001

.002
0.003

+0.017
+ -004

.028
.107
.no

.036
-0.037

0.018
.021

.019
.020
.017
.019

O.O2O

O.O2I

.025
033
.108
.in

.049
0.050

Stations in interior, not in
mountanous regions
Stations in mountainous
regions, below sea-level.
Stations in mountainous
regions, above sea- level.
All stations (except the two
Seattle stations)

All stations

SYSTEMATIC VARIATION FROM HOMOGENEITY
IN AX'

Region

Group

AA'

AA' Group cs, d
minus
AA' Group a, 6

4200-4300
5000-5100

(C5, <*..-.

/C5, <*...-
la. .

159
.163

.165
.178

.165!

.164;

i73\
.i8oj

+O.OOI
.007

(d..

.ICC

.168!

\a..

. 1 70

.172 1

.004

[d..

.164.

i75\

5200-5300

{a..

.I7S

/3 >
.177]

.OO2

Id..

.177

.187!

5300-5400

{a..

. 104

.io6j

- .OOQ

tt..

. I(K

. 2I2l

.212

.2l6f

0.004

102 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

TABLE VI

THE DISTRIBUTION OF EACH GROUP IN ENGLISH IN
GRADES 6-2 TO 12-2 INCLUSIVE

GRADES

CLASS INTERVALS

6-2

7-2

8-2

9-2

10-2

II-2

Junior High-School Group

o? loo .

65
54

33
17
72

54
3

38
54
54
44

23
40
62
52
23

19
24

7i
13

5
9

IS
23

78
18
9

QO- 04.00. .

8s 80.00. .

80 84.00. .

7C 70.00. .

7O 74 . 00 . .

6< 60.00. .

60 64. oo. .

OS IOO

Non- Junior High-School Group

29
6
80
58

5
5

3
IO

77
66

43
9
9i
Si

59
16
6

44
83
18

5
5

19
13

47
84
19
8
8

OO 04 . 00 .

8< 80.00. .

80 84. OQ . .

7C 7Q.OO. .

7O- 74 . 00 . .

6"> 60.00. .

60 64 oo . .

TECHNICAL TERMS

EXPLANATION OF TECHNICAL TERMS

THE POINT SYSTEM

251. The point is the underlying unit of all typographical
measures.

252. The standard of measurement is the pica. A pica
is twelve points (one-sixth of an inch).

This line is set in 12 pt. (pica).
This line is set in n pt. (small pica).
This line is set in 10 pt. (long primer).
This line is set in 9 pt. (bourgeois).
This line is set in 8 pt. (brevier).
This line is set in 7 pt. (minion).
This line is set in 6 pt. (nonpareil).
This line is set in 5 pt. (pearl) .

The sizes larger or smaller than these are seldom
used in book composition.

STYLES OF TYPE

253. Ordinary type is called roman. To "roman-quote"
is to put in roman type between quotation marks.

This line is set in roman.

254. Type with a sloping face is called italic or italics.
Italic is indicated in manuscripts by a straight line
under the word or words (see p. 133)-

This line is set in italics.

105

106 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

255. Type with a heavy black face is called bold face.
Bold face is indicated by a wavy line (see p. 133).
This line is set in bold face.

256. The body of a type is called the shank; the upper
surface, bearing the character, the face; the part
of the face projecting beyond the shank, the kern;
the part of the shank projecting beyond the face,
the shoulder.

257. A font, or complete assortment of a given size, of
type includes large capitals ("caps"), small capitals
("small caps"), and lower-case letters (so called from
being placed in the lower half of the printer's case).
Caps are indicated by three straight lines; small
caps, by two (see p. 133).

THESE ARE CAPS OF 9-PT. ROMAN.

THESE ARE SMALL CAPS OF Q-PT. ROMAN.

These are lower case of Q-pt. roman.

SPACING

258. The technical names for spaces and the methods of
spacing depend on whether the "foundry" type (i.e.,
type set by hand) or machine-set type is in question.
There are several makes of typesetting machines on
the market, but of these the monotype (see 293) and
the linotype (see 294) are in commonest use.

259. The monotype and linotype machines have come
into such universal use that a few words regarding
their respective systems of spacing are proper:

MANUAL OF STYLE: TECHNICAL TERMS 107
MONOTYPE

In monotype composition the unit system instead
of the pica system of measurement is used. There
are 18 units in a quad, which, unlike the em quad
of the foundry type for hand composition, is not a
perfect square at the end. The standard space
(see 261) is a 6-unit space =3-em space; a 5-unit
space =4-em space; a 4-unit space = a little less
than a 5-em space, and is the smallest space in use
on the monotype machine. These are cast from
matrices, and represent "fixed" spaces, i.e., un-
varying in width. On the other hand, in the pro-
cess of composition on the keyboard, the swelling,
or justifying, space is used to fill out a line. When
it is evident that another word or syllable cannot
be set in a line, the keys indicating the proper space
are struck by the operator, and all spaces in the
line are spread equally to fill out the line, resulting
in spaces which do not necessarily contain a specific
number of units (see 293).

LINOTYPE

260. On the linotype machine the pica system of meas-
urement is used. There are three "fixed" spaces
(see 261) : the em quad, the en quad, and the thin
space, which is equal to a 4-em space. To spread
the spaces, a space band is used; this band can
spread a space to any size between a 3-em space
and a space a trifle larger than an en quad. If a

108 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

space smaller than a thin space is required, it must
be put in by hand (see 294).

FOUNDRY TYPE (AND GENERAL)

261. An em, em quad, or simply quad (= quadrat) is a
block of type the top of which forms a perfect
square. A i2-pt. quad is thus a piece of metal
one-sixth of an inch square at the ends. The term
em is also used of the size of such a square in any
given size of type as a unit of measurement.
"Indent 8 pt. 2 ems" thus means that the line should
be indented 16 points. An em quad is used between
complete sentences (see 262). An em dash is a
dash the width of an em.

Two- and three-em quads are multiples of the above,
cast in one block of type metal. Two- and three-em
dashes are dashes the width of 2- and 3-em quads
respectively.

An en quad is half the size of an em quad in width.
Thus an 8-pt. en quad is 4 points wide (thick) and
8 points long (deep). An en dash is a dash the
width of an en quad.

A three-em space is one-third of an em hi thickness.
This is also called a thick space, and is the standard
space used to separate words.
A four-em space is one-fourth of an em; a five-em
space is one-fifth of an em. Four- and 5 -em spaces
are also called middle and thin spaces.
A hair-space is any space thinner than a 5-em.

MANUAL OF STYLE: TECHNICAL TERMS 109

This line is spaced with em quads.

This line is spaced with en quads.

This line is spaced with 3 -em spaces.

This line is spaced with 4-em spaces.

This line is spaced with 5-em spaces.

The letters in this word are hair-spaced: America.

This is a 3 -em dash:

This is a 2 -em dash: -
This is an em dash:
This is an en dash: -

An em dash is often used in indexes and bibliog-
raphies before the first word (without space) of
subentries to save repeating.
A 2-em dash is used to follow a date indicating

time still continuing, as: 1876 .

A 2-em dash is used without space after a word
of which the ending is to be supplied.
A 3-em dash is used (with space on each side) to
denote a whole word omitted or to be supplied.
A 3-em dash is also used in bibliographies to indi-
cate the same author as above.

262. Space evenly. A standard line should have a 3-em
space between all words not separated by other
punctuation points than commas, and after commas;
an en quad after semicolons, and colons followed by
a lower-case letter; two 3-em spaces after colons
followed by a capital; an em quad after periods,
and exclamation and interrogation points, conclud-
ing a sentence.

no THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

263. If necessary to reduce spacing in a line, begin with
commas, and letters of slanting form i.e., with a
large "shoulder" on the side adjoining the space; if
necessary to increase, begin with overlapping let-
ters i.e., with "kerns" protruding on the side
adjoining the space straight-up-and-down letters,
and points other than periods and commas (in this
order).

264. In a well-spaced line, with a 3-em space between
a majority of the words, there should not be more
than an en quad between the rest; this proportion
should be maintained in increasing or reducing. To
justify a line is to adjust it, making it even or true,
by proper spacing.

265. Do not follow an exceptionally thin-spaced line with
an exceptionally wide-spaced one, or vice versa, if
at all avoidable.

266. Never hair-space, or em-quad, a line to avoid a
run-over.

267. Do not space out the last line of a paragraph that
allows of an indention of an em or more at the end.

268. Short words, like "a," "an," etc., should have the
same space on each side.

269. Use a thin space after , f, and similar signs; before
"f.," "ff.," and the metric symbols:

" 14. Be it further ordained . . . ."; pp. ioff.; i6cm.

MANUAL OF STYLE: TECHNICAL TERMS III

270. In American and English sums of money no space
is used between the symbols, $ and (pounds),
5. (shillings) and d. (pence), and the numerals:
$2.75; 10 35. 2d.; 10 C.

271. After Arabic and Roman numerals at the beginning
of lines, denoting subsections, there should be an
en quad. After Arabic and Roman numerals at
the beginning of center-heads there should be an
em quad. Small-cap headings should have an en
quad between the words; cap-and-small-cap and
cap headings, two 3-em spaces.

272. Scripture references should be spaced thus (use
9-unit colon):

II Cor. 1:16-20; 2:5 3:12.

273. a) Between letters forming products, and before
superior figures or letters indicating powers, and
inferior figures or letters, ordinarily no space should
be used:

n x * = 2m 2 (v 2 z 2 zvwyz -\-2W*y*).

b) In capitalized headings use aligning figures.
INDENTATION (PRINTER'S TERM: INDENTION)

274. In linotype composition in measures of less than
10 picas' width, indent all sizes i em. In measures
of from 10 to 20, indent u pt., i em; 10 pt., i|;
9 pt., i^; 8 pt., i^; 6 pt., 2. In measures of from
20 to 30, indent n pt., i^ ems; 10 pt., i^; 9 pt, if;
8 pt., 2; 6 pt., 2^. This is for plain paragraphs.

H2 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

In monotype composition indentions should be
such that all paragraph indentions align irrespec-
tive of the size of the type. The following inden-
tions are a good standard for measures of 19 to
30 picas: n pt. indented i^ ems or i em 9 units;
10 pt. indented if ems or i em 12 units; 9 pt.
indented if ems or i em 15 units; 8 pt. indented
2 ems; 6 pt. indented 2 ems or 2 ems 9 units.
Narrower measures should be indented proportion-
ately less; wider, proportionately more.
In hanging indentions, in measures of less than 10
picas, indent all sizes i em; from 10 to 20, n pt.,
10 pt., 9 pt., and 8 pt., i ems; 6 pt., 2 ems; from
20 to 30, ii pt., io-pt., 9 pt., and 8 pt, 2 ems;
6 pt., 3 ems.

275. In poetry center the longest line and let the inden-
tion be governed by that; unless the longest line
is of disproportionate length, in which case an
average of the long lines should be struck, the idea
being to give the whole a centered appearance.
Where quotations from different poems, following
each other in close succession, vary but slightly in
length of verse lines, it is better to indent all alike.
Indent according to rhymes and length of lines. In
blank verse, where the lines are approximately of
the same length, they should be aligned. If con-
secutive lines rhyme, they should likewise, as a rule,
be aligned. If the rhymes alternate, or follow at

MANUAL OF STYLE: TECHNICAL TERMS 113

certain intervals, indent the rhyming lines alike; that
is, if, e.g., lines i and 3, and 2 and 4, rhyme, set the
former flush in the measure previously determined by
the longest line, and indent the latter (usually one
em) ; follow this scheme in any similar arrangement.
If any line is disproportionately short that is, con-
tains a smaller number of feet indent it more:

And blessed are the homy hands of toil !
The busy world shoves angrily aside
The man who stands with arms akimbo set,
Until occasion tells him what to do.

I laugh at the lore and the pride of man,
At the sophist schools and the learned clan;
For what are they all, in their high conceit,
When man in the bush with God may meet ?

So nigh is grandeur to our dust,

So near is God to man,
When Duty whispers low, "Thou must,"

The youth replies, "I can."

Not lightly fall

Beyond recall
The written scrolls a breath can float;

The crowning fact,

The kingliest act
Of Freedom is the freeman's vote!

276. In ordinary reading-matter "plain paragraphs"
are always preferable. Where it is desired to bring
into relief the opening word or words of a paragraph,
or the number introducing such paragraph, or where
a center-head makes more than three lines, " hanging
indention" is often employed (see 284).

H4 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

LEADS

277. A lead is a strip of metal used to separate lines of
type. The ordinary (standard) lead is 2 points
thick. Matter with leads between the lines is
called leaded; without, solid.

This book, for the most part, is set leaded. This paragraph,
for illustration, and the Index are set solid. Nearly all books
are leaded.

278. A slug is a strip of metal, thicker than a lead, used
in the make-up of printed matter into pages, to be
inserted after headlines, etc. The two standard
sizes are 6 and 12 points (a nonpareil and a pica)
thick, respectively.

HEADS OR HEADINGS

279. A center-head is a headline placed at equal distances
from both margins of the page or column. Center-
heads are usually set in caps or in small caps, and
are not followed by a period. This is a center-
head:

SEC. VH. THE PRINCIPLES OF SOCIOLOGY

When such center-head makes more than one line,
either the (inverted) "pyramid" form (for two or
three lines) or "hanging indention" (for more than
three lines) is employed :

ART EDUCATION FOR THE AMERICAN PEOPLE, AS SHOWN

AT THE LOUISIANA PURCHASE EXPOSITION, m THE

NORMAL SCHOOLS, AND IN ART SCHOOLS

MANUAL OF STYLE: TECHNICAL TERMS 115

ON CERTAIN IMPLICATIONS OF POSSIBLE CHANGES IN THE
FORM AND DIMENSIONS OF THE SUN, AND SOME
SUGGESTIONS TOWARD EXPLAINING CERTAIN PHE-
NOMENA OF VARIABLE STARS

280. A side-head is a headline placed at the side of the
page or column. It may either be set in a separate
line, in which case it is usually set flush that is, in
alignment with the margin of the type-page; or
run in that is, run together in a continuous line
with the paragraph to which it belongs. The latter
is the more common form. Side-heads are most
frequently set in italics, only the first word and
proper names being capitalized; sometimes in caps
and small caps or in bold face (see 172) :

Side-head

A side-head is a headline ....
Side-head. A side-head is ....
SIDE -HEAD. A side-head is ....

Side-head

A side-head is ....

281. A cut-in head is a head placed in a box cut into
the side of the type-page, usually set in different
type, and as a rule placed under the first two lines
of the paragraph:

In making inquiry, therefore, into the value of fraternity

life among the children, it is necessary to test it entirely in

accordance with its power to contribute to the

r u P welfare of the school as a social whole. The

school, being a social organization, has a right

to demand that every individual contribute the best that is

in him to the good of all. In making this contribution, it

Ii6 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

282. A box-head is a head for a column in a ruled table

(see 250).

283. A running-head is a headline placed at the top of
each page of a book, etc., usually giving the main
title of the work on the left-hand (verso) page, and
the title of the chapter, or other subdivision, on
the right-hand (recto} page. It should be cen-
tered on the page regardless of page number. A
good working rule for running-heads is to set them
in roman or italic capitals two sizes (points)
smaller than the type of the text.

PARAGRAPHS

284. Two kinds of paragraphs are distinguished plain
and hanging. A plain (or regular) paragraph has
the first line indented, and the others set flush. A
hanging paragraph ("hanging indention") has the
first line set flush, and the others indented :

Human Nature and the Social Order. By CHARLES HORTON

COOLEY. New York: Scribner, 1902. Pp. viii+404.

In terms of his own thesis Dr. Cooley has transformed

the social materials of his times into a personal product;

his mind has reorganized and reproduced the suggested, etc.

PROOFS

285. A galley-proof is a printed impression of the type
contained in a long, shallow receptacle of metal,
known as a galley, into which the compositor, the
operator, or the casting-machine places the material
as it is set, line by line.

MANUAL OF STYLE: TECHNICAL TERMS 117

286. A page-proof is an impression of the type material
made up into page-form.

287. A plate-proof or foundry -proof is a proof taken of the
type-page immediately before an electrotype cast is
made of it. This proof has a black border around
the pages, made by ink from the metal frame used
to hold the type in place while the cast is being
made. Most publications nowadays are printed
from such plates, and not directly from the type.

288. A foul proof is a galley-proof containing author's
corrections.

289. A revise is a new proof of type corrected from a
marked proof.

MAKE-UP

290. The arranging into page-form of type-lines and
illustrations is called the make-up.

291. A folio is a page-number. Even numbers are placed
on the verso; odd, on the recto. A drop-folio is a
page-number placed at the bottom of a page.

292. A half-title or bastard title is the abbreviated title of
a book placed on a separate page preceding the full
title-page, or the title of a part, chapter, etc., preced-
ing such part or chapter on a separate page in the
body of the book.

n8 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

TYPESETTING MACHINES

293. The monotype named Lanston after the patentee
is a composing-machine on which, by touching a key-
board, perforations are made in strips of paper, which
then are transferred to a second machine, where the
matrices to which the perforations correspond are
brought in contact with molten type metal, the
characters being cast separately and arranged auto-
matically on a galley in justified lines (see 259).

294. The linotype named Mergenthaler after its in-
ventor is a composing-machine on which, by
touching a keyboard, the matrices from which the
characters are cast arrange themselves automati-
cally in lines in a receptacle, which then is brought
in contact, on the same machine, with molten type
metal, through a mechanical device which liberates
and arranges in order on a galley the stereotyped
strips, called "slugs," each consisting of a line of
type (see 260).

APPENDIX

HINTS TO AUTHORS AND EDITORS
PREPARATION OF MANUSCRIPTS

Manuscripts should be either typewritten or in a
perfectly clear handwriting. The former is preferable.

The sheets should be of uniform size; 9"Xn" is a
desirable size.

Only one side of the paper should be used.

Never roll manuscripts; place them flat in a box or
an envelope.

The sheets should not be fastened together except by
pins or clips, which can easily be removed.

When one piece of a page is to be fastened to another,
use mucilage, not pins. Pins often become unfastened
and the slips lost or misplaced.

Liberal margins should be left at the top and left-
hand side of the sheets. This space will be needed by
the reader or printer for directions.

The pages should be numbered consecutively.
Inserted and omitted pages should be clearly indicated.
Thus, sheets to be inserted after p. 4 should be marked
"4A," "46," etc.; sheets omitted between p. 4 and p. 8
should be indicated by numbering p. 4, "4-7."

Additions to original pages should be placed after the
sheets to which they belong, and should be marked
"Insert A," "Insert B," etc. The places where they are

122 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

to be inserted should be indicated by writing, "Here
insert A," etc., on the margin of the original pages.

PARAGRAPHS

Paragraphs should be plainly indicated, either by
indenting the first line or by a ^f mark.

FOOTNOTES

Footnotes should be clearly designated, either by
separating them from the text by running a line across
the page, or by using ink of different color. Some writers
make a perpendicular fold in the paper, using two-
thirds of the space for the text and one-third for the
notes.

The word in the text carrying the note should be followed
by a superior figure corresponding to that preceding the
note.

Footnotes should never be run into the text in manu-
scripts, whether in parentheses or otherwise.

NOTE. It is important to remember that in matter set on the
linotype machine the slightest change necessitates the resetting of the
whole line. Since it is impossible to foresee how the notes will happen
to come out in the make-up, it is impracticable to number them from i
up on each page. The best way is to number them consecutively through-
out an article or by chapters in a book ; bearing in mind, however, the
very essential point that the change, by omission or addition, of one single
number involves the resetting of the whole first line of each succeeding note
to the end of the series, as well as the line in the text bearing the reference
to the note.

This difficulty is not met with in matter set on the monotype machine
or by hand, where the change of a number amounts simply to substituting
one figure for another.

HINTS TO AUTHORS AND EDITORS 123

PROPER NAMES, ETC.

Proper names, foreign words, and figures should, in
handwritten manuscript, be written with the utmost care
and distinctness.

TITLE-PAGES, ETC.

Copy for title-pages, prefaces, tables of contents, etc.,
should be submitted with the manuscript. Copy for
indexes should be compiled from the special set of page-
proofs furnished for this purpose and promptly delivered
to the printers. Unnecessary delay is often caused by
postponing these details till the last minute.

READING OF PROOFS

Read and return your proofs promptly.

In marking proof-sheets use the standard proofreaders'
marks (see p. 133). Do not adopt a system of your own,
which, however plain it may seem to you, might appear
less so to the compositor.

Be careful to answer all queries in the proofs. Delays
and errors often result from not attending to them.

Remember that changes in the type cost money. The
omission or addition of a word in the middle of a para-
graph may necessitate resetting the whole of this from
that point on; and if such alteration is made in the page-
proof, it may further involve repaging the entire article
or chapter. Make your manuscript as perfect as possible
before delivering it to the printer. Any necessary altera-
tions should be made in the galley-proof, as each succeeding

124 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

stage will add to the cost. Corrections in plates should
be studiously avoided. Not only are they expensive, but
they are likely to injure the plates.

The original manuscript should in each instance be
returned with the galley-proof, in order that the proof-
reader may refer to it, should any question arise; and
each successive set of proofs returned should be accom-
panied by the previous marked set. This will assist in
calculating the cost of alterations properly chargeable
to you.

HINTS TO PROOFREADERS 125

HINTS TO PROOFREADERS

Read everything as if you yourself were the author.

Be particularly careful about proper names and figures
and verify all dates. If the copy is not perfectly clear,
or if you have reason to doubt its correctness, look it up,
or query it to the author.

In asking questions of authors or editors make your
point clear. A simple query is not enough to draw
attention to the particular point you have in mind.
Queries in the manuscript should be transferred to the
proof, or attention should be directed in the proof to the
queries made by the copy-reader in the manuscript.

Be discreet about your queries. Do not stultify your-
self and discredit the office by asking foolish questions
on the proof. The author will be thankful for any
sensible suggestion you may make, but will resent trivial
criticisms.

Make a study of the "personal equation" in the case
of those individuals (editors and others) with whom you
as a proofreader will constantly have to deal. One person
may expect of you as a matter of course what another
might regard as an unwarranted interference.

Never hesitate to correct anything that is palpably
wrong, however positively the copy may assert the con
trary. Remember that the blame for the error will
eventually be laid at your door, and justly so.

126 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

Do not follow copy blindly, unreasoningly. Follow
copy only when, and as far as, it is correct.

Do not ask authors or editors to decide questions of
style. The Manual of Style is primarily meant for you.
Learn its rules so that you may correct any violation of
them you may find, without querying to the author.

Do not fall into the fallacy that the author's or editor's
O.K. relieves you of all or any part of your responsibility.
Authors and editors depend on the proofreader to see to
it that the typographical requirements have been met,
and that the adopted style has been adhered to, and
affix their signatures only on that supposition.

Do not shield yourself behind your copyholder. The
copyholder is there to assist you, not to tell you how to
do things. If you think you have cause to doubt her
version of a matter, investigate for yourself.

Do not suggest to the copyholder the reading of a word
or phrase which she has difficulty in making out from the
manuscript. If she cannot decipher the manuscript,
remember that you are the arbiter, and not the compositor.

Do not read to the copyholder except in special cases
in order to rest her after long, close work, and then pro-
ceed slowly and very distinctly. The copyholder's eye
and ear are not yet trained to follow copy with insertions
and special editing as fast as you can read printed matter.

Do not permit yourself to be stampeded. Cultivate
speed, but remember that accuracy is even more impor-
tant. If the necessary time is not given you, take it
within reasonable limits in order to do things right.

HINTS TO PROOFREADERS 127

The credit accruing to you from doing things absolutely
right is likely to outlast the displeasure at your lack of
dispatch.

In unavoidable cases of "rush," where conditions and
orders are imperative, protect yourself by letting it be
understood that you have done your best in the time
allotted you, but that you must disclaim any further
responsibility.

After completing the reading, sign all galley-proofs
and page-proofs in the upper right-hand corner with
your own initial above that of the copyholder and re-
viser. In case copyholding and revising are done by two
different people the copyholder's initial should follow the
reader's in smaller size above a line and the reviser's
initial appear below. This will save time in tracing
proofs and insure the giving of credit where it belongs.

The number of proofs wanted should be marked on
first readings before they are sent to the corrector. Look
for any additional instructions on the job ticket or the
composition ticket and on the copy or author's proofs.

All proofs ready to be corrected are to be returned to
the desk. When galley-proofs are ready to go out to the
author, the copyholder should give the copy to the file
clerk in perfect order, with proofs neatly arranged in the
required number of sets, pinned together at the top.

When you are reading page-proofs, the pages are to be
revised by checking with author's alterations first. Next
make copy for contents (unless the journal editor is in the
habit of furnishing it) and return to be set. so that cover

128 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

and contents may be ready to go out with the page-
proofs.

When you are reading galley-proof, the first thing to
be read is the guide-line with size of type, width of
measure, job number, and galley number.

Mark the author's name and composition number at
the beginning of each article, so that the compositor will
be able to charge alterations correctly. Keep the last
journal or sample beside you when reading the pages and
verify style in every case if you are not perfectly sure
of it. As fast as an article or a chapter is read, return
it to the desk so that corrections may be made in time to
be ready to go out as soon after you have finished the
whole as possible.

Read the running-heads and folios of each article or
chapter as a separate operation after you have finished
reading pages. Sign make-up record, as on pages, in the
upper right-hand corner; enter date and hour of sending
out proof in the lower right-hand corner of page-slip.
Record number of pages and plates in each article or
chapter and total number of pages in the finished product,
including preliminaries. Be careful to see that the fin-
ished book or journal will contain even forms of 16, 12,
or 8 pages; if it does not, the question should be raised.
Number and indicate all half-titles, blank pages, inserts,
etc., and carry all necessary queries on every set of
proofs.

When pages are ready to go out, place them neatly
in sets, pinned together at the top, and return them to

HINTS TO PROOFREADERS 129

the file clerk with all galley-proofs, and additional copy,
if any, in order of make-up, and neatly pinned together.
See that material is complete from cover to cover, includ-
ing volume title and contents when such pages are due.
Return all second proofs to file clerk's desk to file and
leave page-slip on the hook, completed and dated.

130 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

HINTS TO COPYHOLDERS

Cultivate a low, soft, clear reading voice. Only your
own proofreader has to hear you.

Remember that, from the proofreader's point of view,
the small words are as essential as the big ones. Get
them all in and get them in right.

Enunciate your plural s's distinctly. Try to perfect
your enunciation so that you can read an entire galley
without error.

Regulate and equalize your speed. Do not race at a
breakneck pace through typewritten copy, while you thread
your path fumblingly through the mazes of manuscript.

Do not keep guessing at a word. Look at it closely,
consider the context, and do not speak it until you have
made it out or at least made the very best guess of which
you are capable.

Give your reader a chance to make his corrections.
Slow up the moment he puts his pencil to the paper. This
will save your going over the same ground twice. Repeat
cheerfully if the proofreader has not understood.

Evolve your own system of signals. Do not, for
instance, waste time by saying "in italics" for every word
or letter so treated. Instead, raise your voice, or tap
the table with your pencil once for each word, or both.
Such a code need not be intelligible to others than your-
self and your reader.

HINTS TO COPYHOLDERS 131

Read to your proofreader every instruction, editorial
mark, and stet-mark carefully. Learn the job number
and read it for every galley.

Consult the job ticket for the number of proofs wanted
and the name and address of the person to whom they
are to be sent, before having proofs corrected, so that the
number wanted may be marked for the printer.

Be careful in transferring marks. A mark in the wrong
place means two errors uncorrected in place of one cor-
rected. Each set of proofs must carry every mark.

In sending out proofs see that everything is there.
Arrange the copy and proof-sheets neatly and consecu-
tively.

Copy all queries and make-up instructions on the
galley-proof and indicate the insertion of tables, figures,
charts, etc., where they are first mentioned.

The manuscript should accompany the galley-proof;
the foul proof (author's marked galley-proof) should
accompany the page-proof. In case no galley-proof has
been sent the manuscript should accompany the page-
proof.

Indicate in the lower left-hand corner the contents of
all the envelopes you address.

Fasten your pins in the center at the top, not diago-
nally in the left-hand corner, thus covering up the direc-
tions, etc., often written there.

Return every evening to the file or the bookcase any
volume that may have been taken out for reference dur-
ing the day; return all proofs ready for filing at least

132 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

once a day, so that files may be always as complete as
possible.

Remember that you are the housekeeper of the proof-
room, and take pride in its neat and orderly appearance.
Perfect your system so that everything can be located
at a moment's notice. The more of that kind of work
you do without being asked, and the better you do it,
the more you will be appreciated.

PROOFREADER'S MARKS

d> Dele, or delete: take# out.

9 Letter reversed turn.

# Put insjrace.

CJo^e up no space.

VA Bad v spacing^space v lnore /s evenly.

***\ Wrojtfg font: character of wrong size or

style.
** Transp@e.

^ake a new paragraph.
D ^ndent; or, put in an em-quad space.
C C Carry to the left.

3 Cjirry to the right.

X Ipiperfect type correct.

vb Space showsloetween words push down.

*S Straighte 11 crooked line.

HStraighten aligTjJnent.
Restore orjetain, words crossed out.
Print (5!e*, rT, etc.) as a ligature.
Words are omitted from, or in^opy.
Query to author: Is this correct?
Put in capitals.

*** Put in^SMALL CAPITAfcfr.

$** Put in LOWER CASE.

****** Put in -fwwdf* type.

Put in 44alie type.
Put in bold face type.

<w>^\ *

133

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 137

MODERN

FIVE POINT NO. SIXTY-SEVEN

[Solid]

the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, tkey must have

[Leaded]

with his small army, against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests,
show what would have been the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against
the younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered by
his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years aspired to be his sola
successor, hoping to complete his work and regenerate the distracted world by the potent influence of
Hellenistic culture.

A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the Mediterranean Sea, reaching to
THE FROZEN NORTH AND THE TORRID SOUTH AS ITS NATURAL LIMITS, EXCHANGING THR
VIKHIX ORES or SPAIN FOB THE LONG-SOUGHT SPICES OF ABABT THE BLEST, WAS THEBEFORE 1234567890
But while those that had conceived it and striven for it consciously had 1234567830

FIVE POINT NO. FIVE HUNDRED AND TWENTY-SEVEN
[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth,
they must have felt that they had reached one of the great turning-points in the world's
history. There was no longer any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at vari-
ance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in population, in government, in
language, in traditions, would now be directed by the will of one people, by the
influence of one system of law, by the predominance of a common language.

[Leaded]

with all the resources of Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his
small army against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite con-
quests, show what would have been the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius
and armaments, against the younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of
the conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early death, most of the early Diadochi
had each for many hard-fought years aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to com-
plete his work and regenerate the distracted world by the potent influence of
Hellenistic culture.

HAD CONCEIVED IT AND 8TEIVEN FOB IT CONSCIOUSLY HAD FAILED 1234567890

who could have imagined that it should drop almost suddenly, unexpect 12S4SS7890
O,Oaa&ee6oup

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

MODERN

SIX POINT MODERN NO. ONE

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must
have felt that they had reached one of the great turning-points in the world's history. There
was no longer any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, dis-
tracted by reason of contrasts in population, in government, in language, in traditions,
would now be directed by th will of one people, by the influence of one system of law, by
the predominance of a common language.

[Leaded]

the West would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia
under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the adult Rome
OF THE THIRD CENTURY, FRESH FROM HER SAMNITE CONQUESTS, SHOW

WHAT WOULD HAVE BEEN THE SUCCESSES OF ALEXANDER, WITH HIS GIANT GENIUS AND

armaments, against the younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the conqueror t

(no figures with this italic) a at seceJIXE aou $*ttHH>'

12345673 {>0 1234567890$ +x- =
;_^ ~,_~-^ Six set braces to match this feet.

SIX POINT NO. FIFTY-SEVEN

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of
Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the great turning-
points in the world's history. There was no longer any doubt that all the
civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of con-
trasts in population, ia government, in language, in traditions, would now bo
directed by the will of one people, by the influence of one system of law, by
the predominance of a common language.

[Leaded]

not unlike that of Rome ; for the conquest of the West would have been no
difficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under his hand.
The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the adult Rome of the
third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what would have been
the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against the
younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams
WAS HINDERED BY HIS EARLY DEATH, MOST OF THE EARLY

DlADOCHI HAD EACH FOB MANY HARD-FOUGHT YEARS 1234567890

aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete his work 1234567890

AEIOO Afif6tf AElotr AEioCr Afilott Afilotr AgS HH$SST

iEIOu Afil 6tf AElot AEloC AEIOC AE16C AgnS aeiou a616u ae!6n afiiOu aflloua61&a
AEIOO AM6V ASlbtr At6& AWV AMOV f^ffM Thhs&tt
Qeiou deiou beibii Q,eWQ. OSlott deiou d c ft B 8 P p <>. $ J 3 ft cdhh kfi s S t'u'?

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 139

MODERN

SEVEN POINT NO. FIFTY-SEVEN

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and
of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the great
turning-points in the world's history. There was no longer any doubt
that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by
reason of contrasts in population, in government, in language, in tradi-
tions, would now be directed by the will of one people, by the influence
of one system of law, by the predominance of a common language.

It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth
to the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from hia
conquests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very near, an
empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of the West would
have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia
under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against
the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests,
show what would have been the successes of Alexander, with his giant
genius and armaments, against the younger and feebler republic. And
if the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early

[Leaded]

death, most of the early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years
aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete his work and regen-
erate the distracted world by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture.

A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the Medi-
terranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South as its
natural limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the long-sought
spices of Araby the Blest, was therefore no very wild imagination. But
while those that had conceived it and striven for it consciously had failed,
who could have imagined that it should drop almost suddenly, unexpect-
edly, by the force, not of genius, but of circumstances, into the hands of
a people who attained it, not by the direction of an Alexander, but by
such national qualities as had gained for Sparta precedence and respect,
coupled with aggressive wars under the guise of securing ever-widening
frontiers, such as those which mark the rapid strides of Philip's Mace-
donia?

Any political thinker who witnessed this mighty outcome of half a
CENTURY MIGHT INDEED FEEL UNEASY AT THE RESULT,

IP HE WERE NOT, LIKE MOST OF THE STOICS, AN OPTIMIST 1234567890

or a fatalist. There was, no doubt, the manifest gain 1234567890
f&itrfS AfilOtf 64166 fteiofl A&16V A&16V &&U>ti, &&.&H AC
AElOtT lElOtJ aelbu aelou A&ldtf AEIOU atldti, deiou &c&
AElOft AfilOtJ aeloa SSI&a A310& AE10V aei&ti deiou dffl

140 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

MODERN

EIGHT POINT NO. FIFTY-SEVEN

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Car-
thage and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached
one of the great turning-points in the world's history. There was
no longer any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at vari-
ance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in population, in
government, in language, in traditions, would now be directed by
the will of one people, by the influence of one system of law, by
the predominance of a common language.

[Leaded]

of the third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what
would have been the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius
and armaments, against the younger and feebler republic. And
if the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered by his
early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for many hard-
fought years aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete
his work and regenerate the distracted world by the potent influ-
ence of Hellenistic culture.

circumstances, into the hands of a people who 1234567890

AEIOU AFJ6tf AEl6tr 116 A0uj3 AgNce^o^p

AEU AEf66 AEioir AEOC AEIOU Aiou 80 aeiou e"iou aeibu a6i6u
aelou &c.eno aelou deidu aeldii dSlon deidtt acn

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 141

MODERN

NINE POINT NO. FIFTY-SEVEN

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of
Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had
reached one of the great turning-points in the world's history.
There was no longer any doubt that all the civilized nations
hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of con-
trasts in population, in government, in language, in traditions,
would now be directed by the will of one people, by the influ-
ence of one system of law, by the predominance of a common
language.

[Leaded]

Rome; for the conquest of the West would have been no diffi-
cult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under
his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army,
against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her
Samnite conquests, show what would have been the successes
of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against
the younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of
the conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early death, most
OF THE EARLY DIADOCHI HAD EACH FOR MANY

HARD-FOUGHT YEARS ASPIRED TO BE HIS SOLE 1234567890

successor, hoping to complete his work 1234567890
AEIOU AEI6U AElot AE16U AElOU AMOu AgN

AElOU AEfOD AEl6e AEI60 AEloC AEIOtJ ACHHKffT

aeiou a<f6u aei6u aeiou aeiou aeiou achhknt
AEIOU AEf6u AEldU AEfdC AEIOU AEIOU If 8

aeiou d6i6u aelbii aeiou aeWil aeiou acn
CHH|KSSSTZZaaccdgiino6Q^s8suuuuyyzz
H ff S T ' a e 'e h fr i i f s s t'u z D 8 d 1>\>p 033

142 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
MODERN

ELEVEN POINT NO. SIXTY-FIVE

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall
of Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that
they had reached one of the great turning-points in the
world's history. There was no longer any doubt that all
the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, dis-
tracted by reason of contrasts in population, in govern-
ment, in language, in traditions, would now be directed

[Leaded]

by the will of one people, by the influence of one sys-
tem of law, by the predominance of a common language.
It was not the first time that this grand prospect had
been held forth to the world. When Alexander was yet
a young man, returning from his conquests in the Far
East, men must have anticipated, as very near, an empire
NOT UNLIKE THAT OF ROME; FOR THE CON-

QUEST OF THE WEST WOULD HAVE BEEN 1234567890

no difficult matter to Alexander, with 1234567890

AEIOU Atil6tJ AM6U ifilOO AElOtf lEIOtJ

AEIOU AEiou XMou AEIOU AEiiOO AEIOU AQHHKNSST
aeiou 6e"16ti ae!6u &ei6u aeioti a6I6u achbknsst

AEIOU AfilOV Afilbtr A&16V ABIOUAEIOV

delou d6i6ti deidu diQti d&'ioii deiou a Q n

hhistu ?

D8 Dp 00 553* dp

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 143

OLD STYLE

FIVE POINT NO. EIGHT

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must have fell
that they had reached one of the great turning-points in the world's history. There was no longer anj
doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in
population, in government, in language, in traditions, would now be directed by the will of one people,
by the influence of one system of law, by the predominance of a common language.

It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth to the world. When Alex-
ander was yet a young man, returning from his conquests in the Far Fast, men must have anticipated,
as very near, an empire not unlike that of Rome ; for the conquest of the West would have been no dif-
ficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus,

[Leaded]

with his small army, against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests,
show what would have been the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, againsl
the younger and feebler republic. And if the realizations of the conqueror's dreams was hindered by
his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years aspired to be his sole
successor, hoping to complete his work and regenerate the distracted world by the potent influence oi
Hellenistic culture.

A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the Mediterranean Sea, reaching to the
frozen North and the torrid South as its natural limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the
LONG-SOUGHT SPICES OF ARABY THE BLEST, WAS THEREFORE NO VERY WILD
IMAGINATION. BUT WHILE THOSE WHO HAD CONCEIVED IT AND STRIVEN FOR 1234567890
it consciously had failed, who could have imagined that it should drop almost sudden! fjjjjfyigo

TWELVE POINT NO. EIGHT
[SMd]

[Leaded]
OR AT WAR, DISTRACTED BY REASON 1234567890

of contrasts in population, in govern 123456'] 890

AEioti Ai60 6 A g S

AEIOU AEl6tr Etr E ACN ae'iou aelou aeu af6u acn
A FT fill Aftffity APtl C ft

ytiy_;yLxty siJ-^j.\j{j JTLJ^U ./- y. ^v

aeiou d&iou aeu dtidti en

144 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
OLD STYLE

FODBTEEN POINT NO. EIGHT

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius
saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth,
they must have felt that they had reached
one of the great turning-points in the
world's history. There was no longer any
doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto
at variance, or at war, distracted by reason
of contrasts in population, in government,
in language, in traditions, would now be

[Leaded]

directed by the will of one people, by the
influence of one system of law, by the pre-
dominance of a common language.

It was not the first time that this grand
prospect had been held forth to the world.
WHEN ALEXANDER WAS YET A

YOUNG MAN RETURN- I 234567890

ing from his conquests 1234567890
AEIOU AfelOU A6U 6 A N

AEiOu Aiou AEU A c, N
aeioii aei6u aeu aefdii aon age

. . A \.

O O A u dod aeu e~u a n

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 145

OLD STYLE

EIGHTEEN POINT NO. EIGHT
[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Poly-
bius saw the fall of Carthage and of
Corinth, they must have felt that they
had reached one of the great turning-
points in the world's history. There
was no longer any doubt that all the

[Leaded]

civilized nations hitherto at variance,
or at war, distracted by reason of con-
trasts in population, in government,
in language, in traditions, would now
be directed by the will of one people,
by the influence of one system of law.
IT WAS NOT THE FIRST

TIME THAT THIS 1234567890

grand prospect 1234.567890
AEOC A6C feO A ff

146

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

MONOTYPE

SIX POINT NO. THIRTY-ONE

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth,
they must have felt that they had reached one of the turning-points in the world's his-
tory. There was no longer any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance,
or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in population, in government, in language,
in traditions, would now be directed by the will of one people, by the influence of one
system of law, by the predominance of a common language.

It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth to the world.
When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from his conquests in the Far East,
men must have anticipated, as very near, an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the
conquest of the West would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with all the
resources of Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army , against
the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what would
have been the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against the
younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams was
hindered by his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought
years aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete his work and regenerate the
distracted world by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture.

[Leaded]

A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the Mediterranean
Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South as its natural limits, exchanging
the virgin ores of Spain for the long-sought spices of Araby the Blest, was therefore no very
wild imagination. But while those that had conceived it and striven for it consciously
had failed, who could have imagined that it should drop almost suddenly, unexpectedly,
by the force, not of genius, but of circumstances, into the hands of a people who attained
it, not by the direction of an Alexander, but by such national qualities as had gained
for Sparta precedence and respect, coupled with aggressive wars under the guise of secur-
ing ever-widening frontiers, such as those which mark the rapid strides of Philip's Mace-
donia?

Any political thinker who witnessed this mighty outcome of half a century might
indeed feel uneasy at the result, if he were not, like most of the Stoics, an optimist or
a fatalist. There was, no doubt, the manifest gain of a great peace throughout the
world, of the real settlement of disputes by the arbitration of an umpire with power to
enforce his will; there was the consequent development of wide commerce with its
diffusion, not only of wealth, but of enlightenment. These material gains were indis-
putable, even though a dangerous monopoly was being established, not merely through
the enormous advantages inseparable from Roman influence, but by the jealous de-
struction of all those commercial centers which might have rivaled Rome by reason
of favored situation or old traditions of trade.

But far more serious was the patent fact, that neither the Roman people nor their
HENCE IT RESULTED THAT THE COMMON PEOPLE DEGENERATED

RAPIDLY INTO A VULGAR MOB, PURSUING SOLELY ITS MATERIAL I 234567890

pleasures, and the dominant classes, when vast opportunities of wealth 1234567890
XE!OU A16u Afctou AEf6u AEIOU X6I60 C. N f
aeioU aeldu ael&u aeiou aeiou aeiou c ft c N
aeioU diioa deidu dttou deidu MM f n

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 147

MONOTYPE

SEVEN POINT NO. THIRTY-ONE

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of
Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the turning-points
in the world's history. There was no longer any doubt that all the civilized
nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in
population, in government, in language, in traditions, would now be directed
by the will of one people, by the influence of one system of law, by the pre-
dominance of a common language.

It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth to
the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from his con-
quests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very near, an empire
not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of the West would have been no
difficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under his hand.
The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the adult Rome of the
third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what would have been
the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against the
younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams
was hindered by his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for many

[Leaded]

hard-fought years aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete his work
and regenerate the distracted world by the potent influence of Hellenistic
culture.

A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the Mediter-
ranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South as its natural
limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the long-sought spices of Araby
the Blest, was therefore no very wild imagination. But while those that had con-
ceived it and striven for it consciously had failed, who could have imagined
that it should drop almost suddenly, unexpectedly, by the force, not of genius,
but of circumstances, into the hands of a people who attained it, not by the
direction of an Alexander, but by such national qualities as had gained for
Sparta precedence and respect, coupled with aggressive wars under the guise of
securing ever-widening frontiers, such as those which mark the rapid strides of
Philip's Macedonia ?

Any political thinker who witnessed this mighty outcome of half a century
might indeed feel uneasy at the result, if he were not, like most of the Stoics,
AN OPTIMIST OR A FATALIST. THERE WAS, NO DOUBT, THE

MANIFEST GAIN OF A GREAT PEACE THROUGHOUT THE WORLD, 1234567890

of the real settlement of disputes by the arbitration of an umpire 1234567800

aeloii aeiou aeiou aei6u aeiou aeT6u c n 6
aeiou deiou deiou deiou aeiou aeiou q n 5 &

148 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

MONOTYPE

EIGHT POINT NO. THIRTY-ONE

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage
and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the
great turning-points in the world's history. There was no longer any
doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, dis-
tracted by reason of contrasts in population, in government, in language,
in traditions, would now be directed by the will of one people, by the
influence of one system of .law, by the predominance of a common
language.

It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth
to the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from
his conquests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very near,
an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of the West would
have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of
Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army,
against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite
conquests, show what would have been the successes of Alexander,
with his giant genius and armaments, against the younger and feebler
republic. And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered
by his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for many hard-
fought years aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete his
work and regenerate the distracted world by the potent influence of
Hellenistic culture.

[Leaded]

MIGHTY OUTCOME OF HALF A CENTURY MIGHT 1234567890

indeed feel uneasy at the result, if he were not, like m 1234567890

AEIOU AEfoU AEI&U AftoU AEIOU AE*OU C N C

aeloii aei6u aeiou def6u aeiou ae"I6u g n

aeiou deiou aeiou deiou aeiou a&du $ n

TDK H&H $$$T ddhfth H dhst ksttSS 4hms

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 149

MONOTYPE

NINE POINT NO. THIRTY-ONE
[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage
and of Cornith, they must have felt that they had reached one
of the great turning-points in the world's history. There was no
longer any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance,
or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in population, in
government, in language, in traditions, would now be directed
by the will of one people, by the influence of one system of law,
by the predominance of a common language.

[Leaded]

The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the adult
Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests,
show what would have been the successes of Alexander, with his
giant genius and armaments, against the younger and feebler
republic. And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams was
hindered by his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each
for many hard-fought years aspired to be his sole successor,
hoping to complete his work and regenerate the distracted world
by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture.

A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the
DROP ALMOST SUDDENLY, UNEXPECTEDLY, BY THE

FORCE, NOT OF GENIUS, BUT OF CIRCUMSTANCES, 1234567890

into the hands of a people who attained it, not by i 2 j 4 5 6 7 8 g o

AEIOU AEIOU AEIOU AEIOU AEIOU AEIOU C N C

aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou c n
ae'ioii detail aeiou aeiou aeioii aSldii f n Q
A HST dst HST dhsti

150 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
MONOTYPE

TEN POINT NO. THIRTY-ONE

(Solid}

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of
Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had
reached one of the great turning-points in the world's his-
tory. There was no longer any doubt that all the civilized
nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason
of contrasts in population, in government, in language, in
traditions, would now be directed by the will of one people,
by the influence of one system of law, by the predominance
of a common language.

[Leaded]

It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been
held forth to the world. When Alexander was yet a young
man, returning from his conquests in the Far East, men must
have anticipated, as very near, an empire not unlike that of
Rome; for the conquest of the West would have been no diffi-
cult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under
his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army,
against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her
Samnite conquests, show what would have been the successes
of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against
the younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of
the conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early death, most
A WORLD-EMPIRE, INCLUDING ALL THE LANDS

AND NATIONS ABOUT THE MEDITER- 1234567890

ranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North 1234567890

AEIOU AEldft AEIOU AEIOU AEIOU AEIOIJ N

aeioii aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aelou f a n 6
ae'idii deioti aeldu deidu aeiou aeldti Q $ a n o
D HH SST K dhhfykttt

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 151

MONOTYPE

ELEVEN POINT NO. THIRTY-ONE

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of
Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that they
had reached one of the great turning-points in the world's
history. There was no longer any doubt that all the
civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted
by reason of contrasts in population, in government, in
language, in traditions, would now be directed by the
will of one people, by the influence of one system of law,
by the predominance of a common language.

[Leaded]

TO COMPLETE HIS WORK AND REGEN- 1234567890

erate the distracted world by the potent 1234567890

AEIOU AEIOtr AEIOU AEIOTJ AEIOU AEIOU CN HST A

aeioii aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou. aeiou 5 n dhst
aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aewu f f
HST A dhst

152 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
MONOTYPE

TWELVE POINT NO. THIRTY-ONE

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the
fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt
that they had reached one of the great turning-
points in the world's history. There was no longer
any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at
variance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts
in population, in government, in language, in tradi-
tions, would now be directed by the will of one
people, by the influence of one system of law, by the
predominance of a common language.

[Leaded]

IF THE REALIZATION OF THE 1234567890

conqueror's dreams was hin- 1234567890

AEIOU AEIOU" AEIOU AEIOU AElOU AEIOU C N f

aeioii aeiou aeiou aeiou. aeiou aeiou g fi f $
aeiou aeiou aewu aeiou aeiou aeiou dknhhhsst

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 153

MONOTYPE

SIX POINT NO. FIVE

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of
Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the great turning-
points in the world's history. There was no longer any doubt that all
the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason
of contrasts in population, in government, in language, in traditions,
would now be directed by the will of one people, by the influence of one
system of law, by the predominance of a common language.

It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held
forth to the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning
from his conquests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very
near, an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of the West
would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources
of Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army,
against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite
conquests, show what would have been the successes of Alexander, with
his giant genius and armaments, against the younger and feebler republic.
And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early
death, most of the early Diadocni had each for many hard-fought years
aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete his work and regenerate
the distracted world by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture.

[Leaded]

A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the Medi-
terranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South as its
natural limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the long-sought
spices of Araby the Blest, was therefore no very wild imagination. But
while those that had conceived it and striven for it consciously had failed,
who could have imagined that it should drop almost suddenly, unexpectedly,
by the force, not of genius, but of circumstances, into the hands of a
people who attained it, not by the direction of an Alexander, but by such
national qualities as had gained for Sparta precedence and respect, coupled
with aggressive wars under the guise of securing ever-widening frontiers,
such as those which mark the rapid strides of Philip's Macedonia ?

Any political thinker who witnessed this mighty outcome of hah" a
century might indeed feel uneasy at the result, if he were not, like most
of the Stoics, an optimist or a fatalist. There was, no doubt, the manifest
gain of a great peace throughout the world, of the real settlement of
disputes by the arbitration of an umpire with power to enforce his will;
there was the consequent development of wide commerce, with its diffusion,
not only of wealth, but of enlightenment. These material gains were
indisputable, even though a dangerous monopoly was being established,
NOT MERELY THROUGH ENORMOUS ADVANTAGES INSEPARA-
BLE FROM ROMAN INFLUENCE, BUT BY THE JEALOUS 1234567890
destruction of all those commercial centers which 1X3^567890

aeiou aeiofl aeioQ aeiofl aeiou a6I6fl c an u a

aeiou Aeldit aeiou deioii deiou ddou f d d

154 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

MONOTYPE

SEVEN POINT NO. EIGHT

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage
and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the
great turning-points in the world's history. There was no longer any
doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, dis-
tracted by reason of contrasts in population, in government, in language,
in traditions, would now be directed by the will of one people, by the
influence of one system of law, by the predominance of a common
language.

It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth
to the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from
his conquests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very near,
an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of the West would
have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of
Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army,
against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite
conquests, show what would have been the successes of Alexander,
with his giant genius and armaments, against the younger and feebler
republic. And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered
by his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for many hard-
fought years aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete his

[Leaded]

work and regenerate the distracted world by the potent influence of
Hellenistic culture.

A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the
Mediterranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South
as its natural limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the long-
sought spices of Araby the Blest, was therefore no very wild imagination.
But while those that had conceived it and striven for it consciously had
failed, who could have imagined that it should drop almost suddenly,
unexpectedly, by the force, not of genius, but of circumstances, into the
hands of a people who attained it, not by the direction of an Alexander,
but by such national qualities as had gained for Sparta precedence and
respect, coupled with aggressive wars under the guise of securing ever-
widening frontiers, such as those which mark the rapid strides of Philip's
Macedonia ?
OF THE STOICS. AN OPTIMIST OR A FATALIST. THERE

WAS, NO DOUBT, THE MANIFEST GAIN OF A GREAT 1234567890

peace throughout the world, of the real settlement of 123^561890

ae!5Q aeK6& a&iou aeldfr aei6u aeioii c a n 6
aeiou dttdu detdti aeldii deldu aeioii c a fl d

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 155

MONOTYPE

EIGHT POINT NO. EIGHT

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage
and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of
the great turning-points in the world's history. There was no
longer any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance,
or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in population, in govern-
ment, in language, in tradition, would now be directed by the will
of one people, by the influence of one system of law, by the pre-
dominance of a common language.

It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held
forth to the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, return-
ing from his conquests in the Far East, men must have anticipated,
as very near, an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest
of the West would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with
all the resources of Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus,
with his small army, against the adult Rome of the third century,
fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what would have been the
successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against
the younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the

[Leaded]

conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early death, most of the
early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years aspired to be
his sole successor, hoping to complete his work and regenerate the
distracted world by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture.

BY SUCH NATIONAL QUALITIES AS HAD GAINED 1234567890

for Sparta precedence and respect, coupled with 1234567890

aelou aeiou ae!6u ae"i6ti aelou c. a n 6
aewil detail aeldu deidu aelou c. a n o
aeiQ.ura&eIEHKHSdhkstsh6S&

156 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
MONOTYPE

NINE POINT NO. EIGHT
[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Car-
thage and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached
one of the great turning-points in the world's history. There
was no longer any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto
at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in
population, in government, in language, in tradition, would
now be directed by the will of one people, by the influence of
one system of law, by the predominance of a common language.

[Leaded]

under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army,
against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her
Samnite conquests, show what would have been the successes
of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against the
younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the
conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early death, most of
the early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years aspired
to be his whole successor, hoping to complete his work and
regenerate the distracted world by the potent influence of
Hellenistic culture.

A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about
the Mediterranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the
OF AN ALEXANDER, BUT BY SUCH NATIONAL QUAL-

ITIES AS HAD GAINED FOR SPARTA PRECE- 1234567890

dence and respect, coupled with aggressive 1 234567890

aeiou aei6u a616u de^u aelou aelSti c. a n 6 a
aelou aeioti aei&ii deiou aelou aelou $ an o

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 157

MONOTYPE

ELEVEN POINT NO. EIGHT

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of
Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that they
had reached one of the great turning-points in the world's
history. There was no longer any doubt that all the
civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, dis-
tracted by reason of contrasts in population, in govern-
ment, in language, in traditions, would now be directed
by the will of one people, by the influence of one system
of law, by the predominance of a common language.

It was not the first time that this grand prospect had
been held forth to the world. When Alexander was yet
a young man, returning from his conquests in the Far

[Leaded]

East, men must have anticipated, as very near, an empire
not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of the West
would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with
all the resources of Asia under his hand. The successes
of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the adult Rome
of the third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests,
show what would have been the successes of Alexander,
with his giant genius and armaments, against the younger
and feebler republic. And if the realization of the con-
QUEROR'S DREAMS WAS HINDERED BY HIS

EARLY DEATH, MOST OF THE EARLY 1234567890

Diadochi had each for many hard- 1234567890

ae'iou aeiou aeiou deioii aeiou aeiSu a 6 a 9 n
aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou Q z a and

MONOTYPE

SIX POINT GUSHING NO. TWENTY-FIVE

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth,
they must have felt that they had reached one of the great turning-points in the
world's history. There was no longer any doubt that all the civilized nations
hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in population, in
government, in language, in traditions, would now be directed by the will of one
people, by the influence of one system of law, by the predominance of a common
language.

It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth to the
world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from his conquests in
the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very near, an empire not unlike that
of Rome; for the conquest of the West would have been no difficult matter to
Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus,
with his small army, against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Sam-
nite conquests, show what would have been the successes of Alexander, with his
giant genius and armaments, against the younger and feebler republic. And if
the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early death, most of

[Leaded]

the early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years aspired to be his sole
successor, hoping to complete his work and regenerate the distracted world by the
potent influence of Hellenistic culture.

A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the Mediterranean
Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South as its natural limits, ex-
changing the virgin ores of Spain for the long-sought spices of Araby the Blest, was
therefore no very wild imagination. But while those that had conceived it and
striven for it consciously had failed, who could have imagined that it should drop
almost suddenly, unexpectedly, by the force, not of genius, but of circumstances,
into the hands of a people who attained it, not by the direction of an Alexander,
but by such national qualities as had gained for Sparta precedence and respect,
coupled with aggressive wars under the guise of securing ever-widening frontiers,
such as those which mark the rapid strides of Philip's Macedonia?

Any political thinker who witnessed this mighty outcome of half a century
might indeed feel uneasy at the result, if he were not, like most of the Stoics, an
optimist or a fatalist. There was, no doubt, the manifest gain of a great peace
throughout the world, of the real settlement of disputes by the arbitration of an
umpire with power to enforce his will; there was the consequent development of
wide commerce with its diffusion, not only of wealth, but of enlightenment. These
material gains were indisputable, even though a dangerous monopoly was being
established, not merely through the enormous advantages inseparable from
Roman influence, but by the jealous destruction of all those commercial centers
which might have rivaled Rome by reason of favored situation or old traditions
of trade.

BUT FAR MORE SERIOUS WAS THE PATENT FACT, THAT NEI

1234567890

aeioii aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou c

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE

159

MONOTYPE

SEVEN POINT GUSHING NO. TWENTY-FIVE
[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks Kke Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and
of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the great
turning-points in the world's history. There was no longer any doubt
that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by
reason of contrasts in population, in government, in language, in traditions,
would now be directed by the will of one people, by the influence of one
system of law, by the predominance of a common language.

It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth
to the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from
his conquests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very near,
an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of the West would
have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia
under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against
the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests,
show what would have been the successes of Alexander, with his giant
genius and armaments, against the younger and feebler republic. And
if the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early

[Leaded]

A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the Medi-
terranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South as its
natural limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the long-sought
spices of Araby the Blest, was therefore no very wild imagination.
But while those that had conceived it and striven for it consciously had
failed, who could have imagined that it should drop almost suddenly,
unexpectedly, by the force, not of genius, but of circumstances, into the
hands of a people who attained it, not by the direction of an Alexander,
but by such national qualities as had gained for Sparta precedence and
respect, coupled with aggressive wars under the guise of securing ever-
widening frontiers, such as those which mark the rapid strides of Philip's
Macedonia?

aeioii aeiou aeidu aeidu aeiou aelou c

160 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
MONOTYPE

EIGHT POINT GUSHING NO. TWENTY-FIVE

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage
and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the
great turning-points in the world's history. There was no longer any
doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, dis-
tracted by reason of contrasts in population, in government, hi
language, in traditions, would now be directed by the will of one
people, by the influence of one system of law, by the predominance
of a common language.

It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held
forth to the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, return-
ing from his conquests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as
very near, an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest
of the West would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with
all the resources of Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus,
with his small army, against the adult Rome of the third century,
fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what would have been the
successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against
the younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the

[Leaded]

conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early death, most of the
early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years aspired to be his
sole successor, hoping to complete his work and regenerate the
distracted world by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture.

A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the
Mediterranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid
South as its natural limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the
long-sought spices of Araby the Blest, was therefore no very wild
imagination. But while those that had conceived it and striven for
it consciously had failed, who could have imagined that it should
drop almost suddenly, unexpectedly, by the force, not of genius, but
of circumstances, into the hands of a people who attained it, not by
the direction of an Alexander, but by such national qualities as had
gained for Sparta precedence and respect, coupled with aggressive
wars under the guise of securing ever- 1234567890

OF WEALTH, BUT OF ENLIGHTENMENT. THESE MATERIAL

a'eibii aeiou aeidu aeidu aeiou aeiou c

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 161

MONOTYPE

NINE POINT GUSHING NO. TWENTY-FIVE

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of
Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had
reached one of the great turning-points in the world's history.
There was no longer any doubt that all the civilized nations
hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of con-
trasts in population, in government, in language, in tradi-
tions, would now be directed by the will of one people, by
the influence of one system of law, by the predominance of
a common language.

[Leaded]

army, against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh
from her Samnite conquests, show what would have been
the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and arma-
ments, against the younger and feebler republic. And if
the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered
by his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for
many hard-fought years aspired to be his sole successor,
hoping to complete his work and regenerate the distracted
world by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture.

A world-empire, including all the lands and nations
about the Mediterranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North
and the torrid South as its natural limits, 1234567890
EXCHANGING THE VIRGIN ORES OF SPAIN FOR THE

aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou c

162 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
MONOTYPE

TEN POINT GUSHING NO. TWENTY-FIVE

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of
Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had
reached one of the great turning-points in the world's history.
There was no longer any doubt that all the civilized nations
hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of con-
trasts in population, in government, in language, in tradi-
tions, would now be directed by the will of one people, by
the influence of one system of law, by the predominance of
a common language.

[Leaded]

A world-empire, including all the 1234567890
LANDS AND NATIONS ABOUT THE MEDITER-

aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou c

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 163

MONOTYPE

ELEVEN POINT GUSHING NO. TWENTY-FIVE

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the
fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt
that they had reached one of the great turning-points
in the world's history. There was no longer any
doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at vari-
ance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts
in population, in government, in language, in tradi-
tions, would now be directed by the will of one people,
by the influence of one system of law, by the predom-
inance of a common language.

It was not the first time that this grand prospect had
been held forth to the world. When Alexander was

[Leaded]

yet a young man, returning from his conquests in the
Far East, men must have anticipated, as very near,
an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest
of the West would have been no difficult matter to
Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under his
hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small
army, against the adult Rome of the third century,
fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what would
have been the successes of Alexander, with his giant
genius and armaments, against the younger and
feebler republic. And if the realization of the con-
queror's dreams was hindered by 1234567890
ALL THE LAND AND NATIONS ABOUT THE

aeib'ii aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou c.

1 64 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
MONOTYPE

TWELVE POINT GUSHING NO. TWENTY-FIVE (ll PT. FACE)

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the
fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must have
felt that they had reached one of the great turning-
points in the world's history. There was no longer
any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at
variance, or at war, distracted by reason of con-
trasts in population, in government, in language, in
traditions, would now be directed by the will of
one people, by the influence of one system of law,
by the predominance of a common language.

It was not the first time that this grand prospect
had been held forth to the world. When Alexander
was yet a young man, returning from his conquests
in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as

[Leaded]

very near, an empire not unlike that of Rome, for
the conquest of the West would have been no dif-
ficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of
Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus,
with his small army, against the adult Rome of the
third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests,
show what would have been the successes of Alex-
ander, with his giant genius and armaments,
AGAINST THE YOUNGER AND FEEB jE(E
1234567890 1234567890 AAA E 66 U C N C
aeioii aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou cfiyy aeoe
(12 pt. face) faieiu sh

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 165

MONOTYPE

TEN POINT SCOTCH ROMAN NO. THIRTY-SIX

WHEN THOUGHTFUL GREEKS LIKE POLYBIUS S
1234567890

TWELVE POINT CASLON NO. THREE HUNDRED AND THIRTY-SEVEN

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the
fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt
that they had reached one of the great turning-
1234567890 & $

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall
1234567890 JE (E <z oe &$

U \ / A " V \ / A / A u _ \ / A

aaaaaa eeeeee ill oooooo
adadaaa eee 'iii
aaaoensths tsrh

EIGHT POINT ITALIC NO. TWENTY-FIVE K

TEN POINT ITALIC NO. TWENTY-FIVE K

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of
Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had

$ 1234567890 JE (E a? 02 &
Ten Point also cast on Eleven-Point Body

TWELVE POINT ITALIC NO. TWENTY-FIVE K

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the
fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must have
$ 1234567890 M (E a? 02 &

1 66 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

CASLON OLD STYLE

EIGHT POINT
[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of
Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the great turning-points
in the world's history. There was no longer any doubt that all the civilized
nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in popula-
tion, in government, in language, in traditions, would now be directed by the will
of one people, by the influence of one system of law, by the predominance of a
common language.

[Leaded]

lie. And i f the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early
death, most of the early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years aspired to
be his sole successor, hoping to complete his work and regenerate the distracted
world by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture

A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the Mediterranean
Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South as its natural limits,
exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the long-sought spices of Araby the Blest,
was therefore no very wild imagination. But while those that had conceived it and
striven for it consciously had failed, who could have imagined that it should drop
almost suddenly, unexpectedly, by the force, not of genius, but of circumstances,
into the hands of a people who attained it, not by the direction of an Alexander,
but by such national qualities as had gained for Sparta precedence and respect,
coupled with aggressive wars under the guise of securing ever-widening frontiers,
such as those which mark the rapid strides of Philip's Macedonia?

Any political thinker who witnessed this mighty outcome of half a century
might indeed feel uneasy at the result, if he were not, like most of the Stoics,
an optimist or a fatalist. There was, no doubt, the manifest gain of a great
PEACE THROUGHOUT THE WORLD, OF THE REAL SETTLE-
MENT OF DISPUTES BY THE ARBITRATION OF AN 1234567890

umpire with power to enforce his <will; there 1234567890

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 167

CASLON OLD STYLE

TEN POINT
[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage
;nd of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the
great turning-points in the world's history. There was no longer
any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at
war, distracted by reason of contrasts in population, in government,
in language, in traditions, would now be directed by the will of
one people, by the influence of one system of law, by the pre-
dominance of a common language.

[Leaded]

Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the adult Rome of the third
century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what would have
been the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and arma-
ments, against the younger and feebler republic. And if the reali-
zation of the conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early death,
most of the early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years as-
pired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete his work and
regenerate the distracted world by the potent influence of Hellenistic
culture.

WAS THEREFORE NO WILD IMAGINATION. I 234567890

But while those that had conceived it 1234567890

1 68 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
CASLON OLD STYLE

TWELVE POINT
[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the
fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt
that they had reached one of the great turning-points
in the world's history. There was no longer any
doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at vari-
ance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in
population, in government, in language, in traditions,
would now be directed by the will of one people,
by the influence of one system of law, by the pre-
dominance of a common language.

[Leaded]

and feebler republic. And if 1234.567890

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 169

CASLON OLD STYLE

FOURTEEN POINT

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw
the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must
have felt that they had reached one of the great
turning-points in the world's history. There
was no longer any doubt that all the civilized
nations hitherto at variance, or at war, dis-
tracted by reason of contrasts in population, in
government, in language, in traditions, would

[Leaded]

now be directed by the will of one people, by
the influence of one system of law, by the pre-
dominance of a common language.

RESOURCES OF AsiA I 234567890

under his hand. This 1234567890

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

SCOTCH ROMAN

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of
Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the great turning-
points in the world's history. There was no longer any doubt that all the civil-
ized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts
in population, in government, in language, in traditions, would now be directed
by the will of one people, by the influence of one system of law, by the predomi-
nance of a common language.

It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth to
the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from his con-
quests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very near, an empire not
unlike that of Rome ; for the conquests of the West would have been no diffi-
cult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under his hand. The
successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the adult Rome of the third
century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what would have been the
successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against the
younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams
was hindered by his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for many
hard-fought years aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete his work
and regenerate the distracted world by the potent influence of Hellenistic
culture.

[Leaded]

but of circumstances, into the hands of a people who attained it, not by the
direction of an Alexander, but by such national qualities as had gained for
Sparta precedence and respect, coupled with aggressive wars under the guise
of securing ever-widening frontiers, such as those which mark the rapid strides
of Philip's Macedonia?

Any political thinker who witnessed this mighty outcome of half a century
might indeed feel uneasy at the result, if he were not, like most of the Stoics,
an optimist or a fatalist. There was, no doubt, the manifest gain of a great
peace throughout the world, of the real settlement of disputes by the arbitra-
tion of an umpire with power to enforce his will; there was the consequent
development of wide commerce, with its diffusion not only of wealth, but of
enlightenment. These material gains were indisputable, even though a danger-
ous monopoly was being established, not merely through the enormous advan-
tages inseparable from Roman influence, but by the jealous destruction of all
those commercial centers which might have rivaled Rome by reason of favored
situation or old traditions of trade.

But far more serious was the patent fact, that neither the Roman people
NOR THEIR RULERS HAD RECEIVED ANY EDUCATION TO FIT THEM

FOR AN IMPERIAL POLICY, MATERIAL PLEASURES, AND THE 1284567890

dominant classes, when vast opportunities of wealth 1SS3U567890

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 171

SCOTCH ROMAN

EIGHT POINT

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage
and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the
great turning-points in the world's history. There was no longer
any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war,
distracted by reason of contrasts in population, in government, in
language, in traditions, would now be directed by the will of one
people, by the influence of one system of law, by the predominance
of a common language.

It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held
forth to the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, return-
ing from his conquests in the Far East, men must have anticipated,
as very near, an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of
the West would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with all
the resources of Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with
his small army, against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh
from her Samnite conquests, show what would have been the suc-
cesses of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against
the younger and feebler republic.

[Leaded]

A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the
Mediterranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid
South as its natural limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for
the long-sought spices of Araby the Blest, was therefore no very
wild imagination. But while those that had conceived it and striven
for it consciously had failed, who could have imagined that it should
drop almost suddenly, unexpectedly, by the force, not of genius, but
of circumstances, into the hands of a people who attained it, not by
the direction of an Alexander, but by such national qualities as had
gained for Sparta precedence and respect, coupled with aggressive
wars under the guise of securing ever-widening frontiers, such as
those which mark the rapid strides of Philip's Macedonia?

Any political thinker who witnessed this mighty outcome of half
a century might indeed feel uneasy at the result, if he were not, like
HENCE IT RESULTED THAT THE COMMON PEOPLE

DEGENERATED RAPIDLY IXTO A VULGAR MOB 1234567890

pursuing solely its material pleasures, and the 1234567890

172 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

SCOTCH ROMAN

TEN POINT

[Solid]

[Leaded]

have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with all the
resources of Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus,
with his small army, against the adult Rome of the third
century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what would
have been the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius
and armaments, against the younger and feebler republic.
And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered
by his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for
many hard-fought years aspired to be his sole successor,
hoping to complete his work and regenerate the distracted
world by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture.

A world-empire including all the lands and nations about
MEDITERRANEAN SEA, REACHING THE FROZEN
NORTH AND THE TORRID SOUTH AS 1234567890

natural limits, exchanging the virgin l^SJf.561890

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE i?3

SCOTCH ROMAN

ELEVEN POINT

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of
Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that they
had reached one of the great turning-points in the world's
history. There was no longer any doubt that all the
civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, dis-
tracted by reason of contrasts in population, in govern-
ment, in language, in traditions, would now be directed
by the will of one people, by the influence of one system
of law, by the predominance of a common language.

It was not the first time that this grand prospect had
been held forth to the world. When Alexander was yet
a young man, returning from his conquests in the Far

[Leaded]

East, men must have anticipated, as very near, an empire
not unlike that of Rome ; for the conquest of the West
would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with
all the resources of Asia under his hand. The successes
of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the adult Rome
of the third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests,
show what would have been the successes of Alexander,
with his giant genius and armaments, against the younger
and feebler republic. And if the realization of the con-
queror's dreams was hindered by his early death, most of
the early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years
ASPIRED TO BE HIS SOLE SUCCESSOR, HOP-
ING TO COMPLETE HIS WORK AND 1234567890

regenerate the distracted world by 123J^567890

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

SCOTCH ROMAN

TWELVE POINT

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw
the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must
have felt that they had reached one of the great
turning-points in the world's history. There
was no longer any doubt that all the civilized
nations hitherto at variance, or at war, dis-
tracted by reason of contrasts in population, in
government, in language, in traditions, would
now be directed by the will of one people, by the
influence of one system of law, by the predomi-
nance of a common language.

It was not the first time that this grand pros-
pect had been held forth to the world. When

[Leaded]

Alexander was yet a young man, returning from
his conquests in the Far East, men must have
anticipated, as very near, an empire not unlike
that of Rome; for the conquest of the West
would have been no difficult matter to Alex-
ander, with all the resources of Asia under
his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his
small army, against the adult Rome of the third
century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, show
THE YOUNGER AND FEEBLER RE-
PUBLIC. AND IF THE REALIZA- 1234567890

tion of the conqueror's dreams 1234567890

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 175

SCOTCH ROMAN

FOURTEEN POINT
[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polyb-
ius saw the fall of Carthage and of Cor-
inth, they must have felt that they had
reached one of the great turning-points
in the world's history. There was no
longer any doubt that all the civilized
nations hitherto at variance, or at war,
distracted by reason of contrasts in pop-
ulation, in government, in language, in
traditions, would now be directed by the
will of one people, by the influence of

[Leaded]

one system of law, by the predominance
of a common language.

It was not the first time that this
grand prospect had been held forth to
the world. When Alexander was yet a
young man, returning from his con-
quest in the Far East, men must have
anticipated, as very near, an empire not
MATTER TO ALEXANDER, WIT
1234567890 all the resour 1234567890

i 7 6

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

BOOKMAN OLD STYLE

[Solid]

'When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of
Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the great turning-
points in the world's history. There was no longer any doubt that all the
civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of con-
trasts in population, in government, in language, in traditions, would now be
directed by the will of one people, by the influence of one system of law, by
the predominance of a common language.

It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth
to the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from his
conquests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very near, an empire
not unlike that of Rome; for the conquests of the 'West would have been no
difficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under his hand.
The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the adult Rome of the
third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what would have been
the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against the
younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams
was hindered by his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for
many hard-fought years aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete
his work and regenerate the distracted world by the potent influence of
Hellenistic culture.

[Leaded]

Any political thinker who witnessed this mighty outcome of half a century
might indeed feel uneasy at the result, if he were not, like most of the Stoics t
an optimist or a fatalist. There was, no doubt, the manifest gain of a great
peace throughout the world, of the real settlement of disputes by the arbitra-
tion of an umpire with power to enforce his will ; there was the consequent
development of wide commerce, with its diffusion, not only of wealth, but of
enlightenment. These material gains were indisputable, even though a dan-
gerous monopoly was being established, not merely through the enormous
advantages inseparable from Roman influence, but by the jealous destruction
of all those commercial centers which might have rivaled Rome by reason of
favored situation or old traditions of trade.

But far more serious was the patent fact, that neither the Roman people
nor their rulers had received any education to fit them for an imperial policy,
MATERIAL PLEASURES, AND THE DOMINANT CLASSES, WHEN VAST
<A eTVl RJ y r &; tf 1234567890

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 177

BOOKMAN OLD STYLE

EIGHT POINT

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage
and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the
great turning-points in the world's history. There was no longer
any doubt that all the civilized nations, hitherto at variance, or at
war, distracted by reason of contrasts in population, in government,
in language, in traditions, would now be directed by the will of one
people, by the influence of one system of law, by the predominance
of a common language.

It was not the first time that this prospect had been held forth to
the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from
his conquests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very
near, an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of the
West would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with all the
resources of Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with
his small army, against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh
from her Samnite conquests, show what would have been the suc-
cesses of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against
the younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the con-
queror's dreams was hindered by his early death, most of the early
Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years aspired to be his sole

[Leaded]

successor, hoping to complete his work and regenerate the distracted
world by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture.

A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the
Mediterranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South
as its natural limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the long-
sought spices of Araby the Blest, was therefore no very wild imagi-
nation. But while those that had conceived it and striven for it
consciously had failed, who could have imagined that it should drop
almost suddenly, unexpectedly, by the force, not of genins, but of
circumstances, into the hands of a people who attained it, not by the
directions of an Alexander, but by such national qualities as had
gained for Sparta precedence and respect, coupled with aggressive
wars under the guise of securing ever-widening frontiers, such as
those which mark the rapid strides of Philip's Macedonia?
THE MANIFEST GAIN OF A GREAT PEACE THROUGHO
cA oM Rj r y tJfe tf 1234567890

178 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
BOOKMAN OLD STYLE

TEN POINT

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall
of Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that
they had reached one of the great turning-points in the
world's history. There was no longer any doubt that
all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war,
distracted by reason of contrasts in population, in gov-
ernment, in language, in traditions, would now be di-
rected by the will of one people, by the influence of one
system of law, by the predominance of a common lan-
guage.

[Leaded]

with all the resources of Asia under his hand. The
successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the
adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite
conquests, show what would have been the successes
of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments,
against the younger and feebler republic. And if the
realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered by
his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each
for many hard-fought years aspired to be his sole suc-
cessor, hoping to complete his work and regenerate the
distracted world by the potent influence of Hellenistic
NORTH AND THE TORRID SOUTH AS ITS NAT-
o r r 1& & 1234567890

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE

179

BOOKMAN OLD STYLE

TWELVE POINT

[Solid]

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw
the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must
have felt that they had reached one of the great
turning-points in the world's history. There
was no longer any doubt that all the civilized
nations hitherto at variance, or at war, dis-
tracted by reason of contrasts in population, in
government, in language, -in traditions, would
now be directed by the will of one people, by
the influence of one system of law, by the pre-
dominance of a common language.

It was not the first time that this grand
prospect had been held forth to the world.

[Leaded]

"When Alexander was yet a young man, return-
ing from his conquests in the Far East, men
must have anticipated, as very near, an empire
not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of the
West would have been no difficult matter to
Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under
his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his
small army, against the adult Rome of the third
century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, show
AGAINST THE YOUNGER AND FEEB
cTVl Rj> r y* ^e tf 1234567890

i8o THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

PORSON GREEK

SIX POINT

Ta.Se Si pot irdvriat, <fj, Kpoicre, Aef oy ir<o airoj3e'/3i)Kc ra <K rov iv AeA^cus \prj.
OTijpi'ov <roi yap iij Aeyerai iravv ye TC0epa7reva p dat 6 'AiroAAau 1 Kai <7( irdvTo. tKtivtf
vti.96fi.tvov irpaTTiv. 'EBouAopuji' aV, & KGpe, OVTUS x ell/ ' > '^ 1 ' ^< iravra TavafTi'a
v0i> ({ ap\rj? TrpaTTui' irpo<nrivi\Br\v Tto 'ATrdAAwi'i. Ilai? 8; e0Tj 6 KOpo; 8ii5a<r<te
iracv yap iropaiofa. Aeyeis. 'On n-piroi' ftev, e^>j, a/ueA^aa?, ipiarav rov 6ebv tl TI iSto-
(tT)v, a.irtitti.pia/J.riv avrov el Svvaaro aAr)9ciieu'.

EIGHT POINT

Tdoe 5^ ^toi irdvrws, ?077, Kpoi<re, X^ov TTWS diro/3t(3i)KC rd ^K roO ^v

Ka.1 trc irdvra tKelvy irei66/jivov irpdrreiv. ''Epov\6fj.riv &v, & K0/>e,
fw vvv Si vdvra r&vavria

TEN POINT (ON NINE- OR TEN-POINT BODY)

TaSe 8 fJMt TravTtos, e^rj, Kpoiae, A.eov TTWS aTroySe^xc TO, ex
TOV ev AcX^>ots Xpya'T-rjpiov croi yap S^ Xeycrai 7ra^ yc re&pa-
6 'ATToAAwi/ KCU o-e Travra cKctvu 7ret^o/u,i/ov vparruv-
d/iTjv av, a) Krpe, OVTO>S X CIV ' ^^ ^* iraj/ra rdvavrta c C

ELEVEN POINT

TaSe 8e fiot Travrays, <j>rj, Kpotcre, \eov TTW? a
ra etc rov ev Ae\^>ot? %pr)0'rrjpiov' crol yap Brj \eyerat rrdvv
ye reOeparceva'daL 6 'ATro'XXwi' Kai <re rrdvra eiceivcp i c <7

TWELVE POINT

TaSe 8e jtiot Travrw?, 6^)17, Kpoicre, \eov TTW? d-Tro-
jSefirfKe TO, e/c TOV ei/ AeX^>ots -^prjcrTTjpiov crol yap
or) Xeyerat Trai/v ye reOepairevo-OaL 6 'ATroXXwv /cat
MONOTYPE

ELEVEN POINT MONOTYPE

TASe Se juot Travrcos, ^>T;, Kpottre, Xe^oj/ TTCOS a.iro@(3r]K6
TO. IK rov iv AeX<ots xP r ) a " J "np' l - ov ' <roi yap 8rj Xeycrat Travv
ye redepairevffdai, 6 'AroXXcoi' Kai ere Trd^ra eKelvu Trei.d6fj.evov

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 181

ANTIQUE GREEK

EIGHT POINT

TdSe 8e p.oi irdvrws, ({>r], Kpotcre, Xlov TTUS d-n-opepT|K rd 6K rov
cv AcX<|>ois XP T 1 " TT 1P^ OV ' " ' 1 "Y*P STJ Xe*ytTai irdw -ye TcOcpatrcvcrOai 6
*Air6XXv Ka <rt iravra KeCvw iri66|j.{vov irpd-rmv. 'Epov\6[jLT)v av, w
Kvpc, OVTWS Xiv vvv 8 irdvTa rdvavrCa cvOvs 4^ *PX''l s irpdrraiv irpoar-
U 'A-rroXXuvi. IIws S J c(|>i) 6 Kvpos 8(Sa<rK* irdw -yap

ELEVEN POINT

TdSe 8e |ioi iravros, <J>ii, Kpoiae, Xcj-ov TTWS dirope
rd K TOV ev AeX4>o Is XP 1 ! " 7 " 1 !?^ 011 ' "^ "Y-P ^
irdvi) -ye TeBcpaTrcvorOai 6 ' AirdXXwv KCU <r irdvra Ktvco
iri06|JLVov irpaTTiv. 'Epov\6|XT|v av, S Kvpc, OUTCDS

INSCRIPTION GREEK

QPAMMATEY^ANTAKAITHC<t>IAO^EBA^TOY
HEBREW

nnb :D"n$fli uistJia^ pns bsten IIDTO nnpb :nrn ^
TihjT n^b DDT-I osn y^TC"! : n^Ttti n?ji i?bb' ngny o^n

NINE POINT

nb'E Trr-p rtabis *buj

T I"

ctia nnpb jnra ^^^ rh

j- '-** rr ' ft' I T

owsb nnb :

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
NESTORIAN SYRIAC

NINE POINT

I - 1 * ' I'f-^J-v. n j-llc] "" ^ i " i-
_ *-

^I^^ g] ^VslV^O .O3t-^ '1 " I . 1^ V^V'-i .

. ^ X. ' \ ^

.]")) ^ \

P.
-; ( V"<a j Ti *

ARABIC

NINE POINT

wo ^ JutftJI UoU JL4-cio xal

ETHIOPIC

NINE POINT

07-C :

^ft :

t : ft"7.f t : nlA : Xmft-drkC : -00-^1 : XA :

ft : hC
: X1H :

C : iD-Xf : W : rt-OX ; h<n> ;

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 183

MISCELLANEOUS SIGNS

SIX POINT

X-* <* + -&

EIGHT POINT

:::-H-<AD^v'#' ? '

NINE POINT

:: -: Z Z* - / / || | X

ELEVEN POINT

rrb n> q /

SEVEN POINT
FIVE POINT = + -1- X " ' " # TWELVE POINT

= + -

CANCELED LETTERS AND FIGURES

EIGHT POINT

1 84 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

MONOTYPE MISCELLANEOUS SIGNS

Six Point
+ -X + -< ?!? /'*ttH%iJIJIJ

o e e e s N

Seven Point
+ - X + - * >

Eight Point

Z^AA||DO^^<> = ^^/'
+ _ x .. = o, ? , , < .c /% * tt | t

Nine Point
Z*^*A*A*||OO^ <*>* = ^^=/-^*^*~ <*>

+ -x- = 0/ ?.'f|/%*t1:1fHitfHi
tP)<> 41? 1 ?? 1 ! 1

* 8 point on Q point.

Ten Point

Eleven Point

+ ._ x ^ = 0/ ?^' C3 |/*t1:1l%HitfH^

3./" dhmsmgM <^ ^

Twelve Point

+-x = -- / 0/ *tt1 ilUiflJH

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE

185

MONOTYPE SUPERIOR AND INFERIOR

LETTERS AND FIGURES

OLD STYLE

Six Point

Seven Point

1134567890 , 34

Eight Point

abed ef ghi j k 1 m no p q r e t u T w x y I 1234
1234567890

Nine Point

abode fghi j k 1 m n o p q r 8 tu vwxyi 1234567890

1334567890

Ten Point

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvw ab c d e f ghi j k I mn o p q f i t u ,w

xyz abcdefghijklmnopqrs

tvvwxyz 123456-890

Eleven Point
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv

w x y 1234567890

MODERN

SUPERIOR

Six Point

1234S8-8JO

Seven Point
Eight Point

12345678,0

Nine Point

1234567890

Eleven Point
1*34567890

123466 7S90

1234567890

Ten Point

SUPERIOR
1234567890 +-X-i- = -(]

INFERIOR
abcdefghijklmnopqrs

* V * 123486789(

=<> ;: "

t u v w

1 86 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
CASLON OLD STYLE

EIGHTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like 1234
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE

TWENTY-TWO POINT

When thoughtful Greeks 5678
THE FIRST TIME THAT

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

THIRTY POINT

THIRTY-SIX POINT

When thoug 7890
THE FIRST TIM

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 187

CASLON OLD STYLE

FORTY-EIGHT POINT

When th 1234
THEFIRST

CASLON OLD STYLE ITALIC

EIGHTEEN POINT

If^hen thoughtful Greeks like Pol 1 234.
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE

TWENTY-TWO POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like 5678
THE FIRST TIME THAT

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

When thoughtful Greeks 9012
THE FIRST TIME THA

THIRTY POINT

1 88 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
NO. 8 OLD STYLE

TWENTY-TWO POINT

When thoughtful Gre 1234
THE FIRST TIME TH

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

When thoughtful 5678
THE FIRST TIME

THIRTY-TWO POINT

When thoug 9012
THE FIRST TIM

FORTY-FOUR POINT

When th 345
THE FIRST

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 189

NO. 8 OLD STYLE ITALIC

TWENTY-TWO POINT

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

THIRTY-TWO POINT

thou go 1 2
FIRST T

FORTY-FOUR POINT

When
THE FIRST

ELZEVIR ITALIC

TEN POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE ^ T) IM 5^ ^ 12345

1 90 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
CONDENSED OLD STYLE

EIGHT POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD 12345

NINE POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT H 67890

TEN POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROS 12345

TWELVE POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE G 67890

SIXTEEN POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE G 1234

EIGHTEEN POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT T 5678

TWENTY POINT

THE FIRST TIME T 9012

TWENTY-TWO POINT

THE FIRST TIME T 3456

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

THE FIRST TIM 7890

TWENTY-EIGHT POINT

THE FIRST TI 1234

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 191

CONDENSED OLD STYLE

THIRTY-TWO POINT

THE FIRST 5678

THIRTY-SIX POINT

THE FIRS 9012

FORTY POINT

THE FIR 3456

EXTENDED OLD STYLE

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

When thought 123
THE FIRST TIME

THIRTY-TWO POINT

When tho 45
THE FIRST I

1 92 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

EXTENDED OLD STYLE

FORTY-EIGHT POINT

THE FIR

FRENCH OLD STYLE

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth 12345
WHEN THOUGHTFUL GREEKS LIKE POLYBIUS SAW THE FALL OF CARTHAGE AND
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH

SEVEN POINT

WHEN THOUGHTFUL GREEKS LIKE POLYBIUS SAW THE FALL 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD

EIGHT POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Garth 12345
WHEN THOUGHTFUL GREEKS LIKE POLYBIUS SAW THE FALL
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD B

TEN POINT

WHEN THOUGHTFUL GREEKS LIKE POLYBIUS SAW 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT

TWELVE POINT

WHEN THOUGHTFUL GREEKS LIKE POLY 12345-
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PRO

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 193

FRENCH OLD STYLE

FOURTEEN POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR 67890

SIXTEEN POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE 1234

TWENTY POINT

THE FIRST TIME T 5678

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

THE FIRST TIME 901

THIRTY POINT

THE FIRST TI 234

THIRTY-SIX POINT

THE FIRST 56

FORTY-EIGHT POINT

THE FI 78

SIXTY POINT

THE 901

194 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

CHELTENHAM OLD STYLE

When thoughtful Greek* like Polybiui saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they mu 1 2345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FO

EIGHT POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of C 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEE

TEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Ca 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPEC

TWELVE POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the f 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PR

ACCENTED LETTERS SIX TO TWELVE POINT

AAA 111 660 000 g N

aaaa eee iiii 6666 u u ft ii 5 n
CHELTENHAM OLD STYLE ITALIC

SIX POINT

W hen thoughtful Greeks like Polubius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD

EIGHT POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BE

TEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPE

TWELVE POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw th 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND P

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 195

CHELTENHAM OLD STYLE ITALIC

FOURTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polyhius 1234
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR

EIGHTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like 5678

THE FIRST TIME THAT T

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

When thoughtful Greek 901

THE FIRST TIME TH

THIRTY POINT

When thoughtful 1908

THIRTY-SIX POINT

SPECIAL CHARACTERS ALL SIZES

ACCENTED LETTERS SIX TO TWELVE POINT

A o u n

ad a a e e e ill dodo u u u u f n

196 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

CHELTENHAM WIDE

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the (all of Carthage and of Co 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FO

EIGHT POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEE

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fa 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPEC

TWELVE POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PR

FOURTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polyb 1 234
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRA

EIGHTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks lik 5678

THE FIRST TIME THAT TH

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

When thoughtful Gr 90 1 2

THE FIRST TIME THA

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 197

CHELTENHAM WIDE

THIRTY POINT

When thoughtful 345

THE FIRST TIME T

THIRTY-SIX POINT

When though 678

THE FIRST TIM

FORTY-TWO POINT

When thou 90

THE FIRST T

FORTY-EIGHT POINT

When tho 1 2

ACCENTED LETTERS SIX TO TWELVE POINT

AAA EEE III 00 000 Q ft
aaaa eee ii 666 u u ft ti q n

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHIACGO PRESS

CHELTENHAM CONDENSED

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the (all of Carthage and of Corinth, they must ha 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO THE W

EIGHT POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corint 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage 1 2345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEE

TWELVE POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT H

FOURTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw 1 2345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PRO

EIGHTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Pol 67890

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRA

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

When thoughtful Greeks 1 234

THE FIRST TIME THAT TH

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 199

CHELTENHAM BOLD EXTRA CONDENSED

SIX POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must hare felt that the 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO THE WORLD. WHEN AL

EIGHT POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they most 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO THE WO

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FO

TWELVE POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Cartha 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HE

FOURTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fal 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HA

EIGHTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius s 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PRO

200 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

CHELTENHAM BOLD EXTRA CONDENSED

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Po 123
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR

THIRTY POINT

When thoughtful Greeks 1 456
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE

THIRTY-SIX POINT

When thoughtful Gr 789
THE FIRST THE THAT

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 2OI

CHELTENHAM BOLD CONDENSED

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO THE W

EIGHT POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Cor 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FOR

TEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Car 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HELD F

TWELVE POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT H

FOURTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius sa 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PRO

EIGHTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like P 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRA

202 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

CHELTENHAM BOLD CONDENSED

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

When thoughtful Greeks 1234
THE FIRST TIME THAT T

THIRTY POINT

When thoughtful Gre 567
THE FIRST TIME THA

THIRTY-SIX POINT

When thoughtful 890
THE FIRST TIME T

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 203

CHELTENHAM BOLD

When thoughtful Greek* like Poly bi us saw the fall of Carthage and o 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD F

EIGHT POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of C 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BE

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw t 12345.
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPE

TWELVE POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius s 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PR

FOURTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Po 1234
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR

EIGHTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks 5678
THE FIRST TIME THAT TH

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

When thoughtful G 901
THE FIRST TIME THA

204 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
CHELTENHAM BOLD

THIRTY POINT

When thoughtf 234
THE FIRST TIME T

THIRTY-SIX POINT

When thoug 567

THE FIRST TIM

FORTY-TWO POINT

When thou 89

THE FIRST T

FORTY-EIGHT POINT

When th 23
THE FIRST

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 205

CHELTENHAM BOLD

SIXTY POINT

When 14

THE FIR

SEVENTY-TWO POINT

ACCENTED LETTERS SIX TO TWELVE POINT

AAA EE III 66O 000 C N aaaa eeee ml 6666 uuuii ? n
CHELTENHAM BOLD CONDENSED

SEVENTY-TWO POINT

When 6

206 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
CHELTENHAM BOLD CONDENSED

NINETY-SIX POINT

Whe7

ONE-HUNDRED-AND-TWENTY POINT

ThiO

ONE-HUNDRED-AND-FORTY-FOUR POINT

Wil

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE

CHELTENHAM BOLD CONDENSED

ONE-HTJNDRED-AND-EIGHTY POINT

TWO-HtTNDRED-AND-SIXTEEN POINT

208 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

CHELTENHAM BOLD EXTRA CONDENSED

SEVENTY-TWO POINT

When

NINETY-SIX POINT

Tho96

ONE-HUNDRED-AND-TWENTY POINT

Gre

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 209

CHELTENHAM BOLD EXTENDED

SIX POINT

'When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the 1234S6
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD

EIGHT POINT

'When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw 6789
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPE

TEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Po 1234
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND

TWELVE POINT

When thoughtful Greeks lik 1234
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR

FOURTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Gree 5678
THE FIRST TIME THAT TH

EIGHTEEN POINT

When thoughtful 1234
THE FIRST TIME TH

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

When thou 1234
THE FIRST TIME

THIRTY POINT

When tho 567
THE FIRST TI

210 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
CHELTENHAM BOLD ITALIC

SIX POINT

When thoughtful Greek* like Polybiut taw the fall of Carthage a 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD

EIGHT POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fatt of C 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BE

TEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROS

TWELVE POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND P

FOURTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like P 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR

EIGHTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks 5678
THE FIRST TIME THAT T

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

When thoughtful 9012
THE FIRST TIME TH

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 211

CHELTENHAM BOLD ITALIC

THIRTY POINT

When thought 345
THE FIRST TIME

THIRTY-SIX POINT

When thou 678
THE FIRST TI

FORTY-TWO POINT

When tho 90

THE FIRST

FORTY-EIGHT POINT

When th 12
THE FIRS

ACCENTED LETTERS SIX TO TWELVE POINT

Add e i Odd Uuii ft n

212 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

CLARENDON

When thoughtful Greeks like Folybius saw the fall of Carthage an 12345
THE FIEST TIME THAT THE GEAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HEL

NINE POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GEAND PEOSPECT HA

ELEVEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius sa 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PRO

SEVEN POINT FIGURES

1234567890

IONIC

SIX POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Car 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD B

TITLE GOTHIC

SIX POINT NO. SEVENTY-ONE
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORT 12345

SIX POINT NO. SEVENTY-TWO

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN 67890

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 213

DELLA ROBBIA

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they 12345
THE FIRST TIME .THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN SET FORTH

EIGHT POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN S

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall o 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPE

TWELVE POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw th 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PR

FOURTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybi 1234
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE G

EIGHTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks li 5678
THE FIRST TIME THAT T

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

When thoughtful G 9012
THE FIRST TIME TH

214 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
DELLA ROBBIA

THIRTY POINT

When thought 3456
THE FIRST TIME

THIRTY-SIX POINT

THE FIRST TI

FORTY-TWO POINT

When tho 123

THE FIRST I

FORTY-EIGHT POINT

When th 45
THE FIRST

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 215

GUSHING OLD STYLE

FOURTEEN POINT NO. ONE

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND P

FOURTEEN POINT NO. TWO

When thoughtful Greeks like P 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR

EIGHTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks 1 1234
THE FIRST TIME THAT TH

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

When thoughtful G 567
THE FIRST TIME TH

THIRTY-SIX POINT

When thoug 890
THE FIRST TI

FORTY-EIGHT POINT

When tho 12
THE FIRST

2i6 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
CENTURY EXPANDED

SIX POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HEL 12345

EIGHT POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT 67890

TEN POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PRO 12345

ELEVEN POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND 67890

TWELVE POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAN 12345

FOURTEEN POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE 1234

EIGHTEEN POINT

THE FIRST TIME THA 5678

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

THE FIRST TIME 9012

THE FIRST TI 345

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 217

GOUDY OLD STYLE

SIX POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and ot Corint 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN SET FORT

EIGHT POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Cartha 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BE

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT

TWELVE POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PRO

FOURTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Poly 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRA

EIGHTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT TH

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

When thoughtful G 1234
THE FIRST TIME THA

THIRTY POINT

When thoughtf 5678
THE FIRST TIME ?

2i8 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
GOUDY OLD STYLE

THIRTY-SIX POINT

When thou 1234
THE FIRST TI ?

FORTY-TWO POINT

When tho 567
THE FIRST T

FORTY-EIGHT POINT

When th 89
THE FIRST

GOUDY OLD STYLE ITALIC

When thoughtful Qreeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE QRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN SET FORTH

EIGHT POINT

When thoughtful Qreeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE QRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 219

GOUDY OLD STYLE ITALIC

TEN POINT

When thoughtful Qreeks like Polybius saw the fall o} 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE QRAND PROSPECT

TWELVE POINT

When thoughtful Qreeks like Polybius saw the 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE QRAND PROS

FOURTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Qreeks like Polybius s 1234
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE QRAN

EIGHTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Qreeks like 5678
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

When thoughtful Qree 9012
THE FIRST TIME THA

THIRTY POINT

When thoughtful 3456

THE FIRST TIME T

THIRTY-SIX POINT

When thought 789

THE FIRST TIM

220 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

GOUDY BOLD

SIX POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of C 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN SET F

EIGHT POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Ca 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw th 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSP

TWELVE POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND P

FOURTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Po 1234
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR

EIGHTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks 5678
THE FIRST TIME THAT T

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

When thoughtful 9012
THE FIRST TIME TH

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 221

GOUDY BOLD

THIRTY POINT

When though 3456
THE FIRST TIME

THIRTY-SIX POINT

When thou 789
THE FIRST TI

FORTY-TWO POINT

When tho 123
THE FIRST I

FORTY-EIGHT POINT

When th 45
THE FIRS

222 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
PACKARD

EIGHT POINT

When tKougKtful Greeks like Polybius saw tke fall of Carthage and of C 12345

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN

TEN POINT

WHen tKougKtful Greeks like PolyKius saw tKe fall of Ca 67890

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT

TWELVE POINT

When tKougKtful Greeks like Polybius saw tKe fall 12345

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROS

FOURTEEN POINT

WHen tKougKtful Greeks like Polybius s 67890

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND

EIGHTEEN POINT

WKen tKougKtful Greeks like P 11345

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

WKen tKougKtful Greek 67890

THE FIRST TIME THAT

THIRTY POINT

WKen tHougHtful G

THE FIRST TIME T

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 223

PACKARD

THIRTY-SIX POINT

WKen thought 4567

THE FIRST TIM

FORTY-EIGHT POINT

When tko 890

THE FIRST

SPECIAL CHARACTERS ALL SIZES

CLOISTER BLACK

TWELVE POINT

ttougijrtul <greefe* like $olpfc 1234567890

224 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

DE VINNE

SIX POINT

When thoughtful Qreeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and o 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FO

EIGHT POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD B

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT

TWELVE POINT

When thoughtful Qreeks like Polyb 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND

EIGHTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greek 1234
THE FIRST TIME THAT T

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

When thoughtful 567
THE FIRST TIME T

THIRTY POINT

When though 890
THE FIRST TIM

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 225

DE VINNE

THIRTY-SIX POINT

When thou 12
THE FIRST S

FORTY-TWO POINT

When th 34
THE FIRST

SIXTY POINT

When 15
THE FI

226 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

DE VINNE

SEVENTY-TWO POINT

Whei6
THE F

SEVENTY-TWO POINT A

VISE

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 227

DEVINNE

NINETY-SIX POINT

Oh 8
HIM

ONE-HUNDRED-AND-TWENTY POINT

Bel

228 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
DEVINNE CONDENSED

SEVENTY-TWO POINT

Whenl

NINETY-SIX POINT

ONE-HUNDRED-AND-TWENIY POINT

His 3

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 229

DE VINNE CONDENSED

ONE-HUNDRED-AND-EIGHTY POINT

JENSON OLD STYLE ITALIC

FORTY-EIGHT POINT

BOLD-FACE ITALIC

TF7j.cn thoug7itful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Cartha

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN

NINE POINT

IVlien thotightful Greeks like Polybius saiv the 6789O
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPE

230 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

SCOTCH ROMAN

EIGHTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks 1234
THE FIRST TIME THAT

When thoughtful Greeks 123

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

When thoughtful 5678
THE FIRST TIME T

When thoughtful Gr 1

THIRTY POINT

When thought 901
THE FIRST TIM

THIRTY-SIX POINT

When thou 456
THE FIRST T

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 231

SCOTCH ROMAN

FORTY-EIGHT POINT

When th 78

THE FIRS

SIXTY POINT

When 90
THE FI

SEVENTY-TWO POINT

Whel2

232 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

LIGHT-FACE GOTHIC

When thoughtful Greek* like Polybiu* taw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO

EIGHT POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HE

SIX POINT COMBINATION GOTHIC NO. ONE HUNDRED AND SIXTY-THREE

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO THE WORLD 12345

GOTHIC CONDENSED

SIX POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, th 1 2345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO TH

EIGHT POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthag 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HE

TEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD

TWELVE POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius sa 6789
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPE

EIGHTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like P 1234
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRA

TWENTY-TWO POINT

When thoughtful Greeks 5678
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE G

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 233

COPPERPLATE

SIX POINT
NO. ONE

THC FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO THE WOR 1234*

NO. TWO
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH 6789O

NO. THREE
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN H 12345

NO. FOUR

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT 6789O

TWELVE POINT
NO. ONE

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PR 12345

NO. TWO

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR 6789O

WHITTIER

TWELVE POINT
NO. THREE

THE FIRST TIME THAT 12345

NO. FOUR

THE FIRST TIME T 6789

EIGHTEEN POINT
NO. ONE

THE FIRST TIM 1234

NO. TWO

THE FIRST T 1678

BLACK GOTHIC

SIX POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corln 67890

234 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
LINING GOTHIC CONDENSED

SIX POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO THE WORL 1234S6789G

EIGHT POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO THE WOR 12345

TEN POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH 67890

TWELVE POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN 12345

FOURTEEN POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HA 6789

EIGHTEEN POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROS 1234

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR 5678

THIRTY POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT T 90 1 2

THIRTY-SIX POINT

THE FIRST TIME TH 3456

FORTY-TWO POINT

THE FIRST TIME 789

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 235

LINING GOTHIC CONDENSED

FORTY-EIGHT POINT

THE FIRST Tl 123

SIXTY POINT

SEVENTY-TWO POINT

THE FIRST 6

MONARCH

SIXTY POINT

When 12
THE FIR

236 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
INTERCHANGEABLE GOTHIC

SIX POINT
NO. ONE

THK MUST TIME THAT TMB GRAND PROSPECT HAD BCCN HELD FORTH TO THE *

NO. TWO
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO THE 67B9O

NO. THREE
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD 12345

NO. FOUR

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BE 6789O

NO. FIVE

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPE 12345

EIGHT POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND P 67890

TEN POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR 1 234

TWELVE POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT 567

EIGHTEEN POINT

THE FIRST TIM 89

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

THE FIRST 3

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 237

ENGRAVER'S BOLD

SIX POINT
NO. ONE

THK FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO THE WOR 12O4B

NO. TWO
TIIK FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH GT8OO

NO. THREE
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE CRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN 18348

NO. FOUR

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT OT89O

NO HVE

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAIVD PR 12345

TWELVE POINT
NO. ONE

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE 6T89O

NO. TWO

THE FIRST TIME THA 1234

NO. THREE

THE FIRST TIME S6T8

ADVERTISING FIGURES

EIGHTEEN POINT NO. ONE

1234567890

EIGHTEEN POINT NO. TWO

1234567890

THIRTY POINT

1234567890

THIRTY POINT OUTLINE

238 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
LITHO ROMAN

SIX POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius snw the fall of Cart 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEE

EIGHT POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the 6789O
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT

TEN POINT

When 41m uglit ful Greeks like Polyh 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND

TWELVE POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like P 6789O
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR

FOURTEEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks 1 1234
THE FIRST TIME THAT TH

EIGHTEEN POINT

When thoughtful G 5678
THE FIRST TIME THA

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

When though 9012
THE FIRST TIME

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 239

CONDENSED TITLE

EIGHT POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of C 1908
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD B

TEN POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PR 1908

MACFARLAND

TEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPE
When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPEC

FOURTEEN POINT

THE FIRST TIME THAT THE 1234

PAUL REVERE

EIGHT POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Garth 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEE
When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 123456
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BE

NINE POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD

TEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fa 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT

240 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
REPRODUCING TYPEWRITER

SIX POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of
Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that the/ had
reached one of the great turning-points in the world's
history. There was no longer any doubt that all the
civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FOR

NEW MODEL ELITE REMINGTON TYPEWRITER

TEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius
saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth,
they must have felt that they had reached
one of the great turning-points in t 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD

REMINGTON TYPEWRITER

TWELVE POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Poly-
bius saw the fall of Carthage and
of Corinth, they must have felt that
they had reached one of the gr 12345
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPE

NEW MODEL REMINGTON TYPEWRITER

TWELVE POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Poly-
"bius saw the fall of Carthage and
of Corinth, they must have felt
that they had reached one of 67890
THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROS

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 241

BRADLEY TEXT

TEN POINT

When thoughtful Greeks like Poiybius $<w the fall of 12345

TWELVE POINT

Often thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw th 12345

EIGHTEEN POINT

Ulhen thoughtful Greeks like Pol 1234

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

Uihen thoughtful Greek 567$

TUDOR BLACK

SIX POINT

TKHben tbougbtful rcefcs Hfce polbiu0 saw tbe (all of Cartbage ant> of Cor 12345

EIGHT POINT

Ulbcn tboucibtful Freehs Uhc pol^biue daw tbe tall 67390

TEN POINT

Mben tbougbtful Greefts lifte polpbius 12345

TWELVE POINT

Mben tbouabtful (Breefcs like ipol^ 67890

EIGHTEEN POINT

When thoughtful (Breeds 1234

TWENTY POINT

Mben tbougbtful (5 5678

THIRTY-SIX POINT

When tbou 9012

242 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

PRIORY TEXT

EIGHT POINT

tfoouobtful (SceehjS Itfce polpbhtf $aw tbe fan of (Cartbage 12345

TEN POINT

t&ottff&tf ttl (Sreefcg Itfce fjolpbitw caru tlje fall of 67890

TWELVE POINT

tljougljcful ^wefes! libe pol^btug sfatu tl) 12345

FOURTEEN POINT

t^oug^tful (0reeW Itfee ^ol^ 6789

EIGHTEEN POINT

tfjougljtful (greeks life 1234

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

tf)ougl)tful (^ree 5678

9012

THIRTY POINT

THIRTY-SIX POINT

SIX POINT BLACK NO. THIRTEEN

OTfjrn tfjouflfjtful ffirteka like ^polobiua sato tlje fall of Cartilage anH of Count 123^5

TWELVE POINT ENGLISH

tj)ougi)tful (Breeltfii Ufce

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 243

SHifcflt HougWuI (Srwfcs life? Polpbius sato 12345

EIGHTEEN POINT

tbougljtful (gmto life Pole 6789

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

tljou0l)tful (grttfts 12345

THIRTY POINT

timitfoi <S 6789

THIRTY-SIX POINT

FORTY-EIGHT POINT

tail 1 2

244 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

WEDDING TEXT

SIX POINT
thoughtful <Brfe lUu JaI B biu afo ify fail of Citriff s an!> of Corintlj, tljig 12345

EIGHT POINT

fflfycn tfyaugfytful (greeks like ^oigbius snfa 11] e fall of (Carthage mtb 67890

TEN POINT

en ttjmtgljifui OircekB like -Jjloigbuts safe tije fall of 12345

TWELVE POINT

jett t^ou^tful

[jcn tfymtgljtful Cireeks like

FOURTEEN POINT

EIGHTEEN POINT
NO. ONE

ert

EIGHTEEN POINT
NO. TWO

TWENTY-FOUR POINT
NO. ONE

TWENTY-FOUR POINT
NO. TWO

67890

12345

67S9

0123

4567

lib S90

_ SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE _ 245
ENGRAVER'S OLD ENGLISH

SIX POINT

Sljr it t Ijnugljtf ul (Srrrka Ilk* |In ly blua earn tljr fall of CCartfyaijr anil of <Bor 12345

EIGHT POINT

SUjrn ttpwgfitful Oirrrha like JliilyhiitH Baiu Ifjr fall of (Carlljaijr BniUlI

TEN POINT

6rrrUa likr JIolnlttitH aalu tl|r fall 12345

TWELVE POINT

FOURTEEN POINT

1234

EIGHTEEN POINT

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

tlj001jtfl Olr^ 0012

345fi

THIRTY POINT

THIRTY-SIX POINT

tljnug rB9fl

FORTY-EIGHT POINT

246 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

TIFFANY SCRIPT

FOURTEEN POINT

Me gfayfa* to*, tie &# </ ^artia, 42345

if ft

EIGHTEEN POINT

W/nen wcwiM(tt c/veeKb UKe <_/oiw(iwk tou we 67890

TWENTY-FOUR POINT

f4nen mcuanM(M ?wefi& une ^Jol 42345

THIRTY POINT

t &reeKb line 67890

TIFFANY UPRIGHT

TWELVE POINT
tKou/lfuf 0*^ Me ^Pol'/iuA ^Z & faff of GwtRa^ 123*5

FOURTEEN POINT

Me ^afykuA A aW tg faff of C 67890

EIGHTEEN POINT

(JUncn tnaumXai orccfcA liJc <JautoiuA

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE

247

TIFFANY UPRIGHT

TWENTY-FOUR POINT
NO. ONE

TWENTY-FOUR POINT
NO. TWO

THIRTY POINT

5678

&JL 9012

3-V56

TIFFANY SHADED

FOURTEEN POINT

EIGHTEEN POINT

9eCA M

TWENTY-FOUR POINT
NO. ONE

TWENTY-FOUR POINT
NO. TWO

12345

iuA A 67890

67890

^2345

248 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

CAXTON INITIALS

THIRTY-SIX POINT

INITIALS

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE

249

INITIALS

FORTY-EIGHT POINT BURFORD

250 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
INITIALS

SEVENTY-TWO POINT BURFORD

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE

25 1

INITIALS

SEVENTY-TWO POINT BURFORD

FORTY-EIGHT POINT DELLA ROBBIA

252 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

INITIALS

TORTY-EIGHT POINT DELLA ROBBIA

SEVENTY-TWO POINT DELLA ROBBIA

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE

253

INITIALS

SEVENTY-TWO POINT DELLA ROBBIA

254 TH E UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

INITIALS

SEVENTY-TWO POINT DELLA ROBBIA

SIXTY POINT ROYCROFT

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE

255

INITIALS

SIXTY POINT ROYCROFT

256 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

INITIALS

THIRTY POINT JENSON

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 257

INITIALS

MISCELLANEOUS

258 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

INITIALS

MISCELLANEOUS

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE

259

INITIALS

MISCELLANEOUS

260 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO COAT-OF-ARMS

''Cra3''vitu T-n
-^ catScv Gxccv r
ta | lanir ' '

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 261

BRASS CIRCLES

262 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

ORNAMENTS

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE

263

ORNAMENTS

264 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

ORNAMENTS

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE

265

ORNAMENTS

266 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

ORNAMENTS

55 56

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 267

ORNAMENTS

* "fr

69 70 71 72 73 74 75

77 78 79 80 81 82

93 94

89 90

96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105

106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113

113

ffi

BB1 & * $

H '^^^ 117

91 ffi ifi *

121 120 119 H8

_ _

122 123 124 125* 126 127 128 129

268 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

ORNAMENTS

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

jJitK^

140

141

142

143 144 145

146 147 148 149

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE

260

ORNAMENTS

152

155

156

270 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

ORNAMENTS

158

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE

27,1

ORNAMENTS

\\t

164 165 166 167 168

169 170 171 172

173 174 175 176

160

179

180

272 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

ORNAMENTS

181

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE

273

ORNAMENTS

191

195

274 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

ORNAMENTS

196

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 275

ORNAMENTS

i 5

204

205

203

206

207

211

276 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

ORNAMENTS

+ || 215

214

213

212

216

217

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 277

ORNAMENTS

219

220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227

228

229

230

278 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS
BRASS RULE FACES

HAIRLINE (ON ONE- AND TWO-POINT BODY)

DOTTED (ON ONE-POINT BODY)

DOTTED (ON TWO-POINT BODY)

HAIRLINE PARALLEL (ON TWO-POINT BODY)

HALF-POINT SIDE FACE (ON TWO-POINT BODY)

ONE-POINT SIDE FACE (ON TWO- AND THREE-POINT BODY)

TWO POINT
THREE POINT
FOUR POINT

EIGHT POINT

TEN POINT

TWELVE POINT

PRESCRIPTION SIGNS

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 279

BORDERS

TWO POINT
NO. ONE

THREE POINT
NO. TWO

FOUR POINT
NO. FOUR

SIX POINT
NO. FIVE

; .

NO. EIGHT

ni 11 ii ii ini ini ~nr~~ii_ n ~1D

EIGHT POINT
NO. TEN

NO. ELEVEN

NO. TWELVE

2&o THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

BORDERS

TWELVE POINT
NO. THIRTEEN

NO. FOURTEEN

NO. FIFTEEN

NO. SIXTEEN

NO. SEVENTEEN

NO. EIGHTEEN

NO. NINETEEN

KKKKKKKKKKKSKKKSKXSKK

TWENTY-FOUR POINT
NO. TWENTY

SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE

281

BORDERS

THIRTY POINT
NO. TWENTY-ONE

********

THIRTY-SIX POINT
NO. TWENTY-TWO

NO. TWENTY-THREE

NO. TWENTY-FOUR

NO. TWENTY-FOUR A

FORTY-EIGHT POINT
NO. TWENTY-FIVE

INDEXES

INDEX TO MANUAL

[The numbers, unless otherwise indicated, refer to sections]

"A" and "an": use of, before h and ,
114; spacing of, 268.

"a-" (negative particle), compounds with;
a.a.O., use of, 233.

Abbreviations: in literary references, no,
237 (cf. 37); no space between elements
of, 52, 103; not to be divided, 219;
of academic titles, 22; of biblical and
apocryphal books, list of, 100; of di-
rections, street names, locations of
property, 1230; of names of states, 106;
of technicaj terms, list of, in; of titles
of publications, omission of period after
initials used for, 1234,- rules for, 106-11;
omission of period in, i23c; use of apos-
trophe in, 1236; when not to use, 105;
of period after, 1230; no period after
Mile, 123.

"-able" and "-ible," in divisions, 224.

Academic degrees, abbreviation and capi-
talization of, 21-22.

Accents, retention of, in foreign words
incorporated into English, 59.

Acquired, limited, or special meaning,
words having, capitalization of, 25.

Acts, juridical, capitalization of names of,
18.

A.D. (anno Domini): spacing of, 52, 210;
use of small caps for, 52.

Address, capitalization of titles in direct,
21.

Address line: at end of letters, etc., how to
set, 50; at opening of letters, etc., how
to set, 64; omission of comma after, 161.

Addresses, titles of: capitalization of prin-
cipal words in, 41; to be roman-quoted,
82.

Adjectives: capitalization of, in titles,
of publications, 41; compound, 183;
capitalization of, derived from proper
nouns, i, 9; ending in "-ical," how to
divide, 229; foreign words not hyphen-
ated, 59 (p. 27); omission of comma
between two, 147; proper, capitaliza-
tion of, 5 (cf. i, 53).

Administrative bodies, capitalization of
names of, 12.

Adverbial clauses, 150.

Adverbs: capitalization of, in titles of
publications, 41; ending in "-ly," not
to be hyphenated with adjectives or par-
ticiples, 183; use of comma in connec-
tion with, 145.

at, rules for use of, 115.

Ages: historical, linguistic, and geological,
capitalization of, 14; to be spelled out,
09.

Algebraic formulas: italic letters used to
designate unknown quantities in, 67;
spacing of, 273.

Aligning figures, 257, 2736.

Alignment: in columns of tables, 246;
of decimals and dollar signs, 245; quo-
tation marks to be "cleared" in, 90.

Alliances, political, capitalization of names
of, 16.

Alphabetizing of names, rules for, 240.

A.M. (ante meridiem): 52, 219; use of small
caps for, 52.

American system of divisions, 221.

"Ampersand": definition of, 107; when
used, 107.

And: "short," 107; when to use comma
before, 143.

Anglicized derivatives from Latin and
Greek, form of diphthongs ce and <x in,
115-

"Angstrom units," abbreviation for, 23,
in.

"Ante," compounds with, 208.

" Anti," compounds with, 208.

Antithetical clauses, punctuation of, 149

Apocrypha: list of abbreviations for, 109;
titles of, to be set in roman, 60.

Apostles, omission of "St." in connection
with names of, 108.

Apostrophe: rules for use of, 163-65; use
of, in .inlractions, 1236; to form
plural vi numerals, 165; to form pos-
sessive, 164 (cf. 113); to mark omis-
sion of figures or letters, 163 (cf. 1236).

Appositional clauses, punctuation of, 150.

Arabic numerals: spacing of, at beginning
of lines, 271; in headlines, spacing of, 271;
used for biblical references, 134, 173.

285

286

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

Art, titles of works of, to be roman-
quoted, 84.

Article: definite, not to be used in connec-
tion with "Rev." and "Hon.," 92;
not to be treated as part of title of peri-
odicals, 43; indefinite, form of, before en,
sounded h, "one," etc., and long , 114.

Articles, titles of: capitalization of prin-
cipal words in, 41; to be roman-quoted,
82.

Artificial noun-formations, plural of, 165.

Artistic schools, capitalization of names
of, 9.

"As follows," use of colon in connection
with, 132.

Asterisk, use of, for footnote index, 232.

Astronomical terms: capitalization of, 48;
italics not used for, 71.

Astro physical Journal: connecting num-
bers in, 173, note; metric symbols in,
123, note; style for footnotes in, 239,
note; use of comma with figures in,
159, note.

Authors: hints to, pp. 121-24; names of,
if in text, not repeated in footnotes,
23S-

Averages and generalizations, columns
of, in tables, sometimes in distinctive
type, 241, 250 (Table III).

Bastard title. See Half-title.

B.C. ("before Christ"): spacing of, 52,
219; use of small caps for, 52; hundreds
to be repeated with, 173.

"Bi-," compounds with, 197.

Bible: books of, abbreviations for, 109;
capitalization of names for, 29; titles
of books of, to be capitalized, 31; to be
set in roman, 60; versions of, abbrevia-
tions for, 109; capitalized, 30.

Biblical: books, abbreviations for, 109,
and capitalization of names of, 31;
parables, capitalization of, 32; terms,
miscellaneous, capitalization of, 33.

Bills, legislative, capitalization of, 18.

Biological terms, use of capitals in, 46.

Black face. See Bold-face type.

Blank verse, indention of, 275.

Blanks, use of leaders for, in ruled columns
of figures, 245; in open tables, see
specimen tables in, 250.

Blocks, capitalization of names of, 8.

Bodies: legislative, judiciary, and admin-
istrative, capitalization of names of, 12;
military, numbers of, to be spelled
out, 100.

Bold-face type: defined, 255; how indi-
cated, 255.

"Book," compounds of, 186.

Books: biblical, abbreviation of, 109, and
capitalization ot, 31; capitalization of
titles of, 41; italics for titles of, 60.

Botanical Gazette: exception to rule for
capitalization of titles of publications
in, 41, note; to hyphenization of com-
pounds of "co-," etc., 203, note; to rule
for italics, 60, note; to rule for quotation
marks, 82, note; metric symbols in,
123, note; footnotes in, 239, note; thou-
sands in, 159, note.

Botanical terms: use of capitals in, 46;
of italics, 46, 71.

Bourgeois, explained, 252.

Box-heads: defined, 282; how to set,
242; illustrated, 250; . omission of
period after, 125; use of capitals in, 41.

Brackets, rules for use of, 178-79.

Break, or change, in sentence, to be indi-
cated by dash, 166.

Breakline: defined, 217; spacing of, 267.

Brevier, explained, 252.

'Brother," compounds of, 190.

"Brothers," forming part of name of
firm, 107.

Buildings, capitalization of names of, 8.

But-clauses, use of comma in connection
with, 144.

" By-," compounds with, 202*

C, soft, do not divide on, 223.

Capitalization: of abbreviations of aca-
demic degrees, celestial objects, etc.,
22; of abbreviations of one letter,
23; of abbreviations of journals, 42;
of adjectives derived from proper nouns,
i, 42; of adjectives and nouns desig-
nating definite geographical regions,
5; of books of the Bible and other
sacred books, 31; botanical terms, 46;
of church fathers, 27; of conventions,
congresses, expositions, etc., 17; of
creeds and confessions of faith, 19;
of Egyptian dynasties, 13; epithets,
used as proper names, 2; of exclama-
tions "O" and "Oh," 40, 117; of
familiar names applied to particular
persons, 21; of first words, 34-36, 38,
39; of feast days and civic holidays, 20;
of geographical names, 4-5; of geo-
logical epochs, 14, 46; of governmental
departments, 12; of Greek and Latin
poetry, 34; of historical epochs, 14; of
important events^ 15; of legislative,
judiciary, and administrative bodies, 12.

MANUAL OF STYLE: INDEX

287

of linguistic and literary periods, 14, 1 23 ;
of miscellaneous terms, g, 16, 33; of
monastic orders, 10; of names for the
Bible, 29; of names of regiments, 13;
of names and epithets of peoples, races,
and tribes, 47; of names of bodies of
solar system, 48; of "nature," etc., and
abstract ideas, personified, 26; of nouns
and adjectives used to designate the
Supreme Being, or any member of the
Tnnity, 24; of nouns followed by a
numeral, 37; of organizations and
institutions, 11-12; of particles (in
French, Dutch, German names), 3; of
periods in history or literature, 14;
of philosophical, literary, and artistic
schools, 9; of poetry, 34; of political
alliances, 16; of political divisions, 6-7;
of political parties, 9, 16; of principal
words, 41; of pronouns referring to the
Supreme Being, 24; of proper nouns
and adjectives, i, 5, 24, 53; of regions
or parts of world, 5; of terms applied
to groups of states, 5; of religious
denominations and edifices, 9, 28;
of scientific names of divisions, orders,
genera, species, etc., 46; of sessions of
Congress, 13; of thoroughfares, parks,
squares, blocks, buildings, etc., 8;
of titles, academic degrees, orders
(decorations), etc., 21 (cf. 49); of titles
of publications, 41; of titles of manu-
scripts, 44; of treaties, acts, laws, bills,
etc., 18; of versions of the Bible, 30;
of words with an acquired, limited, or
special meaning, i, 25; of zoological
and paleontological matter, 46; verbs
derived from proper names and haying
a specialized meaning, not capitalized,
i; rules for, 1-57; word-lists, 4.

Capitals: how indicated, 257; rules for
use of, 1-49.

Capitals and small capitals, rules for use
of, 50, 51.

Caps. See Capitals.

Catalogues, designation of celestial ob-
jects in, 71.

Center-heads: defined, 279; illustrated,
279; use of capitals in, 41.

"Centigrade," abbreviation for, in.

Centuries, numbers of, to be spelled out,

100.

Cf., to be set in roman, 61.

Chapters, titles of: capitalization of prin-
cipal words in, 41; to be roman-quoted,
82.

Chemical symbols, how to treat, 71, 123.

Christian names, to be spelled out, 93.

"Church," when capitalized, 28.

Church fathers: omission of " St." in con-
nection with names of, 108; when capi-
talized, 27.

Citations: from different authors follow-
ing each other uninterrupted by any
intervening original matter, 73; of pas-
sages in author's own words, 74 (cf.
85); rules for reduction of, 85-87; for
punctuation of, 112.

Civil titles, capitalization of, 21.

Classical references, rules for punctuation,
237-

Clauses, punctuation of: adverbial, 150;
antithetical, 149; appositional, 150;
complementary, 169; conjunctive, 144;
parenthetical, 150, 167, 169, 177;
participial, 148; summarizing, 170.

"Cleared," definition of, 90.

"Co-," compounds with, 203.

Colon: definition and illustration of use
of, 131; rules for use of, 131-36; use
of, after salutatory phrase at beginning
of letters, 133; between place of publi-
cation and publisher's name, 135; in
connection with introductory remarks
of speaker, 133; to emphasize close
connection between two clauses, 131;
to introduce statement, extract, etc.,
131; to separate chapter and verse in
Scripture passages, 134; to separate
volume and page references, 134; clause
from illustration or amplification, 131;
hours and minutes in tune indications,
134-

Columns of figures, spacing of, 245.

Combination of words into one adjective
preceding noun, use of hyphen for,

Comma: definition and illustrations of
use of, 141; omission of, between two
adjectives, 147; in signatures and after
author's name at beginning of articles,
161; use of, after digits indicating
thousands, 159; before "and,'' "or,
and "nor," 143; before "of" in con-
nection with residence or position, 157;
omission of, between consecutive pages,
etc., 158; between month and year, 160;
in connection with adjectival phrases,
152; omitted before "rather," 146;
with adverbial clauses, 150; with anti-
thetical clauses, 149; with appositional
clauses, 150; with brief quotations or
maxims, 156; with clauses ending in
different prepositions, 153; with con-
junctions, 144; with conjunctions,
adverbs, connective particles, and
phrases, 145; with parenthetical clauses,
150; with participial clauses, 148; to

288 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

indicate omissions, 155; to separate
identical, or similar, words, 151; to
separate numbers, 154; to separate
proper nouns, 142; rules for use of,
141-62.

Commercial: firms, how to treat titles of.
107 1 organizations and institutions,
capitalization of names of, n.
"Company," to be abbreviated when

forming part of name of firm, 107.
Complementary clauses, use of dashes in

connection with, 169.
Component elements, omission of, in

compound words, 211.
Compound adjectives, 183.
Compound words, etymological division
of, 221; omission of element common
to two or more, to be indicated by
hyphen, 211.

Compounds: hyphenated, capitalization
of nouns constituting parts of, in titles,
45; of "book," "house," "mill,"
"room," "shop," "work," 186; of
"father," "mother," "brother," "sister,"
"daughter," "parent," and "foster,"
190; of "fellow," 189; of "god," 195;
of "half," "quarter," etc., 196; of
"life" and "world," 192; of "maker"
and "dealer," 187; of "master," 194;
of present participles with nouns or
prepositions, 185; of "self," 198; of
"skin," 193; of "st9re," 188; with
"ante," "infra," "inter," "intra,"
"post," "sub," "super," "supra," and
"anti," 208; with "by-," 202; with
"co-," "pre-," and "re-," 203; with
"extra," "pan," and "ultra," 209;
with "fold," 199; with "great," in lines
of descent, 191; with "like," 200; with
negative particles "un-," "in-," il-,"
"im-," and "a-," 205; with "non-,"
205; with "over" and "under," 207;
with "quasi-," 206; with "semi-,"
"demi-," "tri-," "bi-," etc., 197; with
"vice," "ex-," "elect," and "general,"
in titles, 201.
Confessions of faith, capitalization of

names of, 19.

Congress: capitalization of names of

houses of, 12; of sessions of, 13; mem-

bers-of, to be lower-cased, 21; numbers

of sessions of, to be spelled out, 100.

Congresses, capitalization of names of, 17.

Conjunctions, use of comma in connection

with, 145.
Connective particles, use of comma in

connection with, 145.
" Continued": after headlines, to be set in
italics, 73; at end of articles, etc., to be

placed between brackets, and in reduced

type, 179.
Contraction of word, use of apostrophe in,

1236, 163.

Conventions, capitalization of names of, 17.
Copyholders, hints to, pp. 130-32.
Creeds, capitalization of names of, 19.
Cut-in heads: defined and illustrated,

281; omission of period after, 125; use

of capitals in, 41.
Cycles of poems, titles of: capitalization

of principal words in, 41; to be itali-
cized, 60.
"Czar," when capitalized, 21.

Dagger, use of, for footnote index, 232.

Danish titles of publications, use of capi-
tals in, 42c.

Dashes: definition and illustrations of use
of, 166; different sizes of, explained,
261; illustrated, 261; rules for use of,
in punctuation, 166-75; use of, at end
of word or phrase implied at beginning
of each of succeeding paragraphs, 171;
for emphasis, 168; in connection with
literary references, 174; with other
points, 175; with parenthetical clauses,
168-69; with complementary clauses,
169; with direct discourse in French
and Spanish, 1716; to connect numbers,
173; to denote break, stop, transition,
or change in sentence, 166; to precede
summarizing clauses, 170; for purposes
other than punctuation, 261.

Dates: hundreds repeated, when and
when not, 173; of publications, to follow
volume numbers in references to periodi-
cals, 238; other order of citation, 238;
st, d, and th to be omitted from, 102;
use of comma between month and year
in, 160.

"Daughter," compounds of, 190.

"De," rule for treatment of, 240*:.

"Dealer," compounds of, 187.

Decades, references to, to be spelled out,
101.

Decimal point, period leader used for, 244.

Decorations, capitalization of names of , 21 .

Degrees, academic, abbreviation and capi-
talization of, 21-22.

"Demi-," compounds with, 197.

Denominations, religious, capitalization
of names of, 9.

Departments: governmental, capitaliza-
tion of names of, 12; of University of
Chicago, 49-

MANUAL OF STYLE: INDEX

Derivation, division according to, to be
avoided, 221.

Derivatives: from Greek and Latin, 115;
from proper names, 53; English, from
scientific names not capitalized, 46; from
words ending in /, how to divide, 227.

Diagrams, letters referring to, 68.

Digraphs. Ste Ligature.

Dimensions, punctuation, 94, 159.

Diphthongs, to be treated as one letter in
divisions, 226.

Divided word to be avoided: at end of
next to last line of paragraph, 217; at
bottom of recto page, 217.

Division of words: rules for, 215-31;
systems of, 221; use of hyphen to indi-
cate, 182; avoidance of unnecessary,
215; on two letters, to be avoided, 216;
of foreign words, 231; never on syllable
with silent vowel, 221; in foreign lan-
guage, 231.

Divisional mark in middle of sentences,
not to be put at end of line, 220.

Divisions of publications, titles of: capi-
talization of principal words in, 41 ; to be
roman-quqted, 82.

Divisions, political: capitalization of
names of, 6-7; numbered, to be spelled
out, 100.

Divisions of the University of Chicago,
capitalization of names of, 49.

Documents, titles of: capitalization of
principal words in, 41; to be italicized,
60 (cf. 18).

Double dagger, use of, for footnote index,
232.

Double rules, use of, in tables, 247.

Doubt, use of interrogation point to ex-
press, 129.

Drop-folio, defined, 291.

Dutch names, capitalizing of "Van" and
"Ten" in, 3; indexing of, 24oc; titles of
publications, use of capitals in, 42^.

Dynasties, Egyptian: capitalization of
names of, 13; to be spelled out, 100.

Editions: number of, indicated by superior
figure within punctuation, 237 (n. 6).

Editors, hints to, pp. 121-24.

Educational organizations and institu-
tions, capitalization of names of, ir.

E.g., to be set in roman, 61.

"Elect," suffixed to titles, 201.

Ellipses: rules for use of, 180-81; to be

treated as part of quotation, 88, 181;
use of, to indicate omissions, 180.

Em, defined, 261.

Em dash: defined, 261; illustrated, 261;
use of, for "to" in time indications,
173-

Em quad: after sentences, 261, 262; de-
fined, 261; illustrated, 261.

Emphasis: use of dashes for, 168; of
exclamation points, 127; of italics, 58.

En dash: defined, 261; illustrated, 261;
use of, instead of comma between con-
secutive pages in literary references, 158
(cf. 173); instead of hyphen, in com-
pounds, 183; for "to" connecting two
words or figures, 173.

English: equivalent of foreign word or
phrase, to be quoted, 78 ;_ system of
division, 221; titles of publications, use
of capitals in, 41.

En quad: defined, 261; illustrated, 261.

Enumerations, use of parentheses in con-
nection with letters or figures used to
indicate subdivisions in, 176.

Epigrammatic turn, use of dash to indi-
cate, 166.

Epithets, capitalized, when used as proper
names, 2.

Epochs, historical and geological, capitali-
zation of names of, 14.

Equivalent, English, of word or phrase
from foreign language, to be roman-
quoted, 78.

Errata, for and read italicized in, 62.

Essays, titles of: capitalization of prin-
cipal words in, 41; to be italicized, 60.

Etc.: use of comma before, 143; when
to be treated as part of quotation, 88.

Etymology, division according to (Eng-
lish system), 221.

eu, form of indefinite article before, 114.

Even spacing, importance of, 265.

Events, important historical, capitaliza-
tion of names of, 15.

"Ex-," prefixed to titles, 201.

Exclamation point, rules for use of, 127-
28.

Exclamatory "Oh," 117.

Explanation: of technical terms, 251-94;
use of brackets for, 178.

Expositions, capitalization of names of, 17.

"Extra," compounds with, 209.

Extracts, rules for punctuation of, 112.

2QO THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

F., ff. (=" following"): spacing of, 269;
use of, no.

Face, defined, 256.

"Fahrenheit," abbreviation for, in.

"Farther" and "further," differentiation
of, 1 1 6.

"Father": compounds of, igo; when
capitalized, 27.

Feast days, capitalization of names of, 20.

"Fellow," compounds of, 189.

Figures: columns of, in tables, 245; rules
for use of, 94-98.

Figures (illustrations) in text, letters re-
ferring to, 68, 93.

Firms, names of commercial: abbrevia-
tion of, 107; capitalization of, u.

First words: after a colon, when capital-
ized, 35; following "Whereas" and
"Resolved" in resolutions, capitali-
zation of, 39; in sections of enumera-
tion, when capitalized, 36; in titles of
publications, capitalization of, 41; of
citations, when capitalized, 38 (cf. 131);
of lines of poetry, capitalization of, 34;
of quotations, when lower case is used
for, 57 (cf. 131); of sentences, capitali-
zation of, 34.

Five-em space, denned, 261.

"Flush," defined, 280.

"Fold," combinations with, igg.

Folio, defined, agi.

Font, defined, 257.

Footnotes: exceptions to general style
for, 237, 239, note; general style for,
237; indexes for references to, 232;
numbering of, 239; placing of index
figure, 236; rules for, 232-39; samples
of, 237; to tables, 234.

Foreign institutions and organizations,
capitalization of titles of, n.

Foreign languages: division of words in,
231; English translation accompany-
ing word, phrase, or passage cited from,
to be quoted, 78; sentences and passages
quoted from, how to treat, 59, 85; words
and phrases from, use of italics for, 59;
words and phrases borrowed from, in-
corporated into English, how to treat, 59.

Foreign titles of publications, capitaliza-
tion of, 42.

"Format" of books (410, 8vo, etc.), not
to be treated as abbreviations, I23C.

Formulas: spacing of, 273; use of italics
in, 67.

"Fort," to be spelled out, 104.

"Foster," compounds of, 190.

Foul proof, defined, 288.

Foundry-proof, defined, 287.

Four-em space, defined, 261.

Fractions, use of hyphen in, 210.

French: ellipsis, 180; titles of publications,
use of capitals in, 426; use of ligatures
as or <e in, 115; words, division of, 231.

"Further" and "farther," differentiation
of, 116.

G, soft, do not divide on, 223.
Galley, defined, 283.
Galley-proof, defined, 285.
"General," combined with title, 201.
Geographical names, capitalization of, 4,

5,6.
Geological terms, capitalization of, 14, 46;

italicizing of, 71.
Geometry, letters used to designate lines,

etc., in, 67.
German: index figures in, 232: names

with umlaut, indexing of, 240*2 ; titles

of publications, use of capitals in, 42^;

words, division of, 231.
Given names. See Christian names.
"God," compounds of, 195.
Governmental departments, capitalization

of names of, 12.
Grain, abbreviation for, in.
Gram, abbreviation for, in.
" Great," compounds of, 191.
Greek words, division of, 231.

H, form of indefinite article before
sounded, 114.

Hair-space, defined, 261: illustrated, 261.

Hair-spacing, tabooed, 266.

"Half," combinations of, with nouns,
196.

Half-title, defined, 292.

Hanging indention: defined and illus-
trated, 279, 284; indention in, 274.

Headings, described, 279-83.

Headlines: of tables, how to set, 249;
omission of period after, 125; spacing
of, 271; word "continued" following,
to be set in italics, 73.

Heads. See Headings, Headlines.

Historical: epochs, capitalization of apel-
lations for, 14; events, capitalization of,
15; terms of special significance, capi-
talization of, 16.

Holidays. See Feast days.

MANUAL OF STYLE: INDEX

291

Honorary titles, capitalization of, 21.

"Horse-power," abbreviation for, in.

"House," compounds of, 186.

Hyphen leader, denned, 244.

Hyphenated words: division of to be
avoided, 225; list of, 214; foreign terms
used as adjectives not to be hyphen-
ated, 59.

Hyphens: number of consecutive, allow-
able at ends of lines. 217; rules for use
of, 182-214.

Ibid., use of, 233.

Ideas, abstract, capitalization of, when

personified, 26.
I.e., to be set in roman, 61.
If-clauses, use of comma in connection

with, 144.
Illustrations, letters referring to parts of,

68.

Implication of word or phrase, to be indi-
cated by dash, 171.
Importance, use of italics for, 58.
"In-" (negative particle), compounds

with, 205.

Indentation. See Indention.
Indention: explained, 274; of poetry,

275; rules for, 274-76.
Index figure, placing of, 236.
Indexes for footnote references: how to

number, 239; placing of, 236; sequence

of, 232; what to use for, 232.
Indexing: italicizing of "See," "See also,"

in cross-references, 62; rules for, 240;

sizes of type and style for setting, 240;

treatment of prefixes and particles in

proper nouns, 240.
Industrial organizations and institutions,

capitalization of names of, n.
" Infra," compounds with, 208.
Initials: of titles of publications, use of,

123; separation of, in different lines, to

be avoided, 219.
Institutions: capitalization of names of,

n; use of roman type for foreign, 59.
"Inter," compounds with, 208.
Interpolations, use of brackets for, 178.
Interrogation point, use of, 129-30.
"Intra," compounds with, 208.
Ironical word or phrase: use of quotation

marks for, 77; use of exclamation

point for, 127.
ise and -ize, differentiation between, as

terminations, 120.

Italian titles of publications, use of
capitals in, 426; words, division of, 231.

Italics: defined, 254; how indicated, 254;
need not be used in lengthy biblio-
graphical lists, 60; rules for use of,
58-73.

Italicizing: of address lines, 64; of astro-
nomical names, 71; of letters designating
unknown quantities, 67; of letters refer-
ring to letters in illustrations, 68; of
names of genera and species, 71; of
initial word, Resolved, 72; of names of
catalogues of planets, constellations, and
stars. 71; of symbols indicating sub-
divisions, 66; of symbols for shillings and
pence, 70; of titles or position after sig-
natures, 65; of titles of books and other
works, 60; of titles of legal causes and
proceedings, 63; of titles of newspapers,
to include name of city where published,
when, 60; of words for and read in
errata, 62; of words "See" and "See
also" in cross-references in indexing, 62;
of words and phrases to which emphasis
is to be given, 58; of words and phrases
from foreign languages, 59; of words
used in literary references, 6 1 ; of words
representing continuation of article or
chapter, 73.

J, do not divide on, 223.

Journals. See Periodicals.

Judiciary bodies, capitalization of names

of, 12.
Juridical acts, laws, bills, capitalization of

names of, 18.
"Justification," defined, 264.

Kern, defined, 256.

Lanston. See Monotype.

Last words, capitalization of, in titles of
publications, 41.

Latin: non-uses of ligatures and ce in,
115; titles of publications, use of capi-
tals in, 420; words, division of, 231.

Laws, juridical, capitalization of names
of, 18.

"Leaded," defined, 277.

Leaders: definition and use of, 244; in
tables, 245, 250.

Leads, defined, 277.

Lectures, titles of: capitalization of prin-
cipal words in, 41; to be roman-quoted,
82.

Legends: letters in, 68; omission of period
after, 125.

Legislative bodies, capitalization of names
of, 12.

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

Letters: in text or legends referring to
corresponding letter in accompanying
illustrations (diagrams), 68; references
to particular, to be set in italics, 69.

"Life," compounds of, 192.

Ligatures <z and ce, use of, 115.

"Like," adjectives ending in, 200.

Linguistic periods: abbreviation of names
for, 123; capitalization of, 14.

Linotype machine (Mergenthaler) : de-
scribed, 294; how to number footnotes
in matter set on, 239; spacing on, 260.

List: of hyphenated words, 214; of words
of more than one spelling, 119.

Literary references: abbreviations in, 54,
107, no, 237; words representing divi-
sions, when capitalized, 37; list of
phrases and abbreviations used in, 61.

Literary -schools, capitalization of names
of, 9.

Loc. cit., use of, 233.

Long primer, explained, 252.

Lower case: defined, 257; exceptions in-
cluded in do not's of, i, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9,
n, 12, 14, 21, 24, 25, 28, 29, 31, 35, 37.
45, 46 (see under Capitalization); for
English derivatives from scientific
names, 46; rules for use of, 53~S7-

Machines, typesetting, different styles

of, 293-94-

Magazines. See Periodicals.
"Maker," compounds of, 187.
Make-up, defined. 290.
"Manuscript," abbreviation for, 44, 123.
Manuscripts, titles of: to be set in roman,

60; use of capitals in, 44.
" Master," compounds of, 194.
Mathematical signs, spacing of, 273.
Measurement: units of, 94; spelled with

lower-case initial letter, 55; spelled out

at beginning of sentence, 96.
Measures, metric, how to designaie, ill.
Medical terms, capitalization oi, 46; use

of italics in, to be avoided, 71.
"Mac," "Me," "M 1 ," rule for treatment

of, 240.
Merganthaler. See Linotype.

Metric: symbols, how to treat, I23c; spa-
cing of, 269; system, designation of
weights and measures in, in.

Military titles, capitalization of, 21.
"Mill," compounds of, 186.

Minion, explained, 252.
Miscellaneous terms, capitalization of, 33.
Mile and Mme, abbreviations, 123.
Monastic orders, capitalization of names

of, 10.

Monetary symbols, spacing of, 270.
Money; sums of, how to treat, 94, 97;

in various countries, 37, 270.
Monotype machine (Lanston): described,

293; spacing on, 259.
Months, names of, when to be spelled

out, 102.

"Mother," compounds of, 190.
Mottoes: capitalization of principal words

in, 41; to be roman-quoted, 82.
"Mount," to be spelled out, 104.
Movements, historical, capitalization of

names of, 16.

"Namely," use of colon in connection
with, 132.

Names: alphabetization of, 240; Chris-
tian, to be spelled out, 93; familiar,
applied to particular persons, to be
capitalized, 21; proper, capitalization
of, i.

Nature, personified, capitalization of, 26.

Negative particles "un-," "in-," "il-,"
"im-," and "a-," compounds with, 205.

Newspapers, titles of: the article not to be
treated as part of, 43; capitalization of
principal words in, 41; to be italicized,
60.

New Testament books, list of abbrevia-
tions for, 109.

Nobility, capitalization of titles of, 21.

"Non-," compounds with, 205.

Nonpareil, explained, 252

"Nor," when comma is used before. 143.

"Not," use of comma before, in anti-
thetical clauses, 149.

"Note" introducing note not a footnote,
use of cap and small caps for, 51.

"Nothing," not to be divided, 230.

Nouns: capitalization of, in titles of pub-
lications. 41; combination of, standing
in objective relation to each other, 184;
ending in a sibilant, formation of plural
of, 165; followed by numeral, capitali-
zation of, 37 (cf. no); proper, capi-
talization of, i (cf. 5, 53).

Numbered political divisions, capitaliza-
tion of names of, 7.

MANUAL OF STYLE: INDEX

293

Numbers: commencing a sentence, to be
spelled out, 96; consecutive, treatment
of, 159, 173; in connected groups to be
treated alike, 94; in groups of six or
more closely connected, to be set in
figures. 94; of less than three digits, to
be spelled out in ordinary reading-
matter, 94; round, treatment of, 95;
use of comma after digits indicating
thousands, 159; use of comma to sepa-
rate, 154; use of dash for "to" con-
necting, 173.

Numerals: Atabic, at beginning of lines
and in headlines, spacing of, 271;
Roman, at beginning of lines and in
headlines, spacing of, 271; omission of
period after, 124.

'O" and "Oh": capitalization of, 40;
differentiation in use of, 117.

Occupations, compounds denoting, 187.

<e. rules for use of, 115.

Officers: titles of, to be lower-cased, 21;
of University of Chicago, to be capi-
talized, 49.

Offices, capitalization of names of, 12, 21.

Old Testament books, list of abbreviations
for, 109.

Omission: of comma after signatures, etc.,
161; of figures in numbers or letters
in middle of word, use of apostrophe
for, 163; of period after headlines, etc.,
125; after Roman numerals, 124; of 5,
d, and tit in dates, 102; of word or words,
indicated by comma, 155; use of brack-
ets for. 178; use of ellipsis for, 180.

"One," "once," etc., form of indefinite
article before, 114.

Op. cil., use of, 233.

Open tables: headlines for, 242; how to
set, 241; specimens of, 250.

"Or," when comma is used before, 143.

Orders (decorations), capitalization of
names of, 21

Orders, monastic, capitalization of names
of, 10.

Ordinals: when capitalized, 13; when
not, 45.

Organizations, capitalization of names of,
n.

Outcry, use of exclamation point after, 127.

"Over," compounds with, 207.

Pages, etc., omission of comma with four
digits, when, 139; spelled out, when, 237;
symbol "p." to be used, when, 237; use
of en dash between consecutive, 158
(cf. 173).

Page-proof, defined, 286; rules for use

in, 217, and pp. 127-29.
Paleontolqgical terms: use of capitals in,

46; italics not used in, 71.
Pamphlets, titles of: capitalization of

principal words in, 41; to be italicized,

60.

Papers (addresses), titles of: capitaliza-
tion of ptincipal words in, 41; to be

roman-quoted, 82.
Parables, biblical, capitalization of names

of, 32.
Paragraph mark: spacing of, 269; use of,

for footnote index, 232.
Paragraphs: explained, 284; first lines of,

in quoted prose matter to begin with

quotation marks. 89; indention of, 274;

styles of, 276 (cf. 284).

Parallel mark, use of, for footnote index,
232.

"Parent," compounds of, 190.

Parentheses: rules for use of, 176-77;
use of, for parenthetical clauses, 177
(cf. 150, 177); in connection with figures
or letters indicating subsections, 66, 176;
within parentheses, use of brackets for,
178.

Parenthesis, placing of period in connec-
tion with, 126.

Parenthetical clauses: use of commas in
connection with, 150; of dashes, 167,
169; of parentheses, 177 (cf. 150, 167).

Parks, capitalization of names of, 8.

Participial clauses, use of comma in con-
nection with, 148.

Participle: omission or retention of final
e in original word, when, 118; present,
united with noun, or with preposition,
185.

Particles, in French, Dutch, and German
names, capitalization of, 3.

Parties, political, capitalization of names
of, 9.

Parts (of books, etc.), titles of: capitali-
zation of principal words in, 41; to be
roman-quoted, 82.

Pause, use of dash to indicate, 166.

Pearl, explained, 252.

Pence. See Shillings.

Peoples, races, and tribes, capitalization
of names or epithets of, 47.

Per cent: to be expressed in figures, 94;
not to be treated asan abbreviation, 123.

Percentages, columns of, in tables, some-
times in distinctive type, 241.

294 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

Period: placing of, in connection with
quotation marks, 126; rules for use
of, 122-26; to be omitted after abbre-
viations for linguistic epochs, 123; after
headlines and legends for cuts and
tables, 125; after initials of titles of
publications, 123; after MS ^manu-
script), 123; use of, after abbreviations,
123; at end of sentence, 122 (cf. 125);
in classical references, 237.

Period leader, defined, 244; used for deci-
mal point, 244; for pointing in German
and Spanish numbers, 159 (note).

Periodicals, titles of: capitalization of
principal words in, 41; definite article
not to be tieated as part of, 43; to be
italicized, 60.

Periods, geological, historical, linguistic,
and literary, capitalization of names of,
14.

Personifications, capitalization of, 26.

Philosophical schools, capitalization of
names of, 9.

Phrases: adjectival, use of comma in con-
nection with, 152; conjunctional, etc.,
I4S-

Pica, explained, 252.

Place of publication and publisher's name,
use of colon between, 135.

Place-names, foreign, how to treat, 59.

Plain paragraph: defined and illustrated,
284; indention of, 274.

Plate-proof, defined, 287.

Planets, names of, how treated, 71.

Plays, titles of: capitalization of prin-
cipal words in. 41; to be italicized, 60.

Plurals: formation of, 165; of abbrevia-
tions of decades, 101; in literary refer-
ences, how formed, no; of nouns, not
divisible if singulars are not, 228; of
numerals and of rare and artificial noun
coinages, formation of, 165.

P.M. (post meridiem): spacing of, 52;
division of, 219; use of small caps for, 52.

Poems: capitalization of first word of each
line in English, 34; of first word of each
paragraph in Greek and Latin, 34; of
principal words in titles of, 41; titles
of shorter, to be roman-quoted, 81 (cf.
60); titles of, when set in italics and
when in roman, 60.

Poetry: capitalization of first lines, 34;
indention of, 275; quotations from,
when to reduce, 85; when to run into
the text, 83.

Point system, explanation of 251-52.

Political: alliances, capitalization of
names of, 16; divisions, 6-7; organi-
zations, n; parties, 9.

"Pope," when capitalized, 21.

"Port," to be spelled out, 104.

Position, use of comma before "of" in
connection with, 157.

Possessive case, how formed, 113, 164.

"Post," compounds with, 208.

Pounds: in English money, how expressed,
70, 270.

"Pre-," compounds with, 203.

Preface, etc., quotation marks to be omit-
ted with, 82.

Prefix or suffix not complete in itself, to
be indicated by hyphen, 212.

Prefixes "co-," "pre-," and "re-," how
to treat, 203.

Prepositions: formation of nouns of pres-
ent participles in connection with, 185;
to be lower-cased in titles, 41; use of
comma in connection with clauses end-
ing in different, 153.

"President," when capitalized, 21, 49.

Principal words: capitalization of, in
titles of publications, 41; definition of,
41.

Proceedings (of societies), titles of: capi-
talization of principal words in, 41; to
be italicized, 60.

Pronouns: capitalization of, in titles of
publications, 41; referring to Deity, 24.

Pronunciation, division according to
(American system), 221.

Proofreaders: hints to, pp. 125-29; marks
of. p. 133-

Proofs, description of, 285-89.

Proper names: capitalization of, i; how
to form possessive of. 113; verbs and
adjectives derived from, use of lower
case for, 53.

Proper nouns: capitalization of, i, 5;
division of. to be avoided, 218; when
not capitalized, 53.

Prose: extracts, when to reduce, 85;
when to run into text, 85; indention of
paragraphs in, 274.

Publications: period to be omitted after
initials used as abbreviations for, 123;
titles of, capitalization of principal
words in, 41; titles of subdivisions of,
when to be roman-quoted, 82; use of
italics for, 60; when to be spelled out,
iS-

Punctuation: of extracts from modern
authors, 112; rules for, 121-214.

MANUAL OF STYLE: INDEX

295

Punctuation marks: omission of, in clas-
sical references, 237; placing of, with
reference to index figures in text, 232;
to be printed in same type as word or
letter preceding them, 121.

"Pyramid," explained and illustrated, 279.

Quad, defined, 261.

Quadrat. See Quad.

"Quarter," compounds of, 196.

4to, 8vo, etc., not to be treated as abbre-
viations, I23C.

"Quasi-," compounds with, 206.

Query, use of interrogation point for, 129.

Question mark. See Interrogation point.

Questions: direct, to be followed by inter-
rogation point, 129; indirect, not to be
followed by interrogation point, 129; in
Spanish, 129.

Quotation marks: not to be used in con-
nection with reduced citations, 87;
excepti9n to this rule, 75; placing of
colon in connection _ with, 136; of
comma, 162; of ellipsis, 181; of excla-
mation point, 128; of interrogation
point, 130; of period, 126; of semi-colon,
140; rules for use of, 74-91; French
and German, p. 33, footnote; to be
omitted in references to Preface, Index,
etc., 82; use of double and single, 91.

Quotations, how to treat, 74-91; first
word of, lower-cased when connected
with previous sentence, 57.

Races, tribes, and peoples, capitalization
of names or epithets of, 47.

"Railroad" and "Railway," to be spelled
out, 104.

"Re-," compounds with, 203.

Reading-matter in columns of ruled tables,
how to set, 246, 250.

Recto, defined, 283.

Reductions: rules for, 85-87, 179; scale
of, 86.

Reference indexes, what to use for, 232.

References, legal, list of words and phrases
used in, 61; literary: list of words to
be abbreviated in, no (cf. 37, 54, 237);
in text, spelled out. 92; punctuation of,
etc., 237, 239, note; use of dash in
connection with, 174.

"Reformer," when capitalized, 27.

Regiments, capitalization of names of, 13.

Regions or parts of the world, capitali-
zation of names of, 5.

Regular paragraph. See Plain paragraph.

Religious: denominations, capitalization
of names of, 9; organizations, n.

Residence, use of comma before "of" in
connection with, 157.

Resolutions: how to introduce para-
graphs in, 39, 51, 72; word "Resolved"
in, how to set, 72; word "Whereas,"
Si-

"Resolved," in resolutions, to be set in
italics, 73.

Revise, defined, 289.

Rhymed lines, in poetry, indention of,
275-

Roman numerals: at beginning of lines,
spacing of, 271 ; in headlines, spacing of,
271; omission of period after, 124*.

"Roman-quote," defined, 74, 253.

Roman type: defined, 253; illustrated,
257; anglicized foreign words in, 59;
bibliographical list of books, 60; e.g.,
i.e., v. or vs., viz., 61; Fraunhofer
lines, 710; letter used in place of name,
69; lines of hydrogen, 71; spectral types
of stars, 71; symbols for chemical ele-
ments, 71.

"Room," compounds of, 186.

Round numbers, definition and treatment
of, 95-

Ruled tables: blanks in, how expressed,
245; box-heads for, 242; reading-
matter in, 246; size to set, 241; space
between rules and type, 243; specimens
of, 250; stub, how to set, 244.

Sacred books, capitalization of names of,
29.

"Saint": to be omitted in connection
with names of apostles, church fathers,
etc., 108; when abbreviated, 108.

Salutatory phrase at beginning of letters,
rules for setting, 50.

Scandinavian titles of publications, use of
capitals in, 42.

Schools, philosophical, literary, and artis-
tic, capitalization of names of, 9.

Scientific terms, use of capitals in, 46; of
italics in, 71.

Scripture passages: names of books of
Bible to be abbreviated in, 109; punc-
tuation of, 134, 139; spacing of, 272.

"Section," introducing paragraphs and
followed by a number, use of cap and
small caps for, 51.

Section mark: spacing of, 269; use of, for
footnote index, 232.

Sects, religious, capitalization of names
of, 9.

See and See also italicized, when, 62.

296

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

"Self," compounds of, 198.
"Semi-," compounds with, 197.

Semicolon: separating two or more dis-
tinct clauses in enumerations, 36; illus-
ttation of use of, compared with that of
comma, 137; placing of, in connection
with quotation marks, 140; rules for
use of, 137-40; use of, in enumerations,
138; to mark division of sentence, 137;
to separate passages in Scripture refer-
ences containing chapters, 139.

Separation: of terms complete in them-
selves not to be made, 219; of word at
end of recto page, 217.

Sequences: of footnote indexes, 232; of
subdivisional numberings, 176; of three
or more links, use cf comma before
"and," "or," and "nor" in, 143.

Series titles, to be roman-quoted, 80.

Series, use of comma before final "and,"
"or," and "nor" in, 143.

Sermons, titles of, to be roman-quoted,
82.

Shank, defined, 256.

Shillings and pence, how to treat abbre-
viations for, 70.

Ships, names of, to be roman-quoted, 83.

" Shop," compounds of, 186.

"Short and": definition of, 107; when
used, 104, 107.

Short words: avoidance of divisions of,
216; spacing of, 268.

Shoulder, defined, 256.

Side-heads: defined, 280; omission of
period after, 125; use of dash in con-
nection with, 172; use of lower case
in, 56 (cf. 172).

Signatures at end of letters or articles:
omission of comma after, 16 1 ; of period,
125; abbreviation of address in, 106;
rules for setting of, 50, 65.

"Sister," compounds of, 190.

Sizes of type, in ordinary use, samples of,
252.

"Skin," compounds of, 193.

Slug, defined, 278.

Small caps: defined, 257; how indicated,
257; use of, 52; in tabular work, 242,
249; in headings, 279.

Small pica, explained, 252.

Social organizations, capitalization of
names of, n.

Soft c or g, do not divide on, 223.

Solar system, capitalization of names of
bodies in, in works on astronomy, 48.

"Solid," defined, 277.

Space omitted between components of
certain abbreviations, 22, 52, 103, 163.

Spaces: different sizes of, explained, 259,
261; specimen of lines spaced with
different sizes of, 261.

Spacing: in breakline, 266-67; in foundry
type (and general) composition, 261-64;
in linotype composition, 260; in mono-
type composition, 259; its effect on ety-
mological divisions, 221; of divisional
signs, 269; of figure columns in tables,
245; of formulas, 273; of headlines, 271;
of metric symbols, 269; of monetary
symbols, 270; of numerals at beginning
of paragraphs, 271; of rules in tables,
243; of Scripture passages, 272; of short
words, 268; rules for, 258-73; standard,
262; what is considered good, 262;
with different sizes of spaces, samples of,
261.

Spanish titles of publications, use of capi-
tals in, 426; words, division of, 231.

Species, scientific names of: use of capi-
tals in, 46; of italics, 71.

Specimen tables, 250.

Spelled out, words, phrases, and titles
which are to be, 92-105.

Spelling: list of words of more than one,
119; of ages, 99; of books of Bible, 109;
of centuries, 100; of Christian names,
93; of "Company" and "Brothers"
in names of firms, 107; of decades, 101;
of Egyptian dynasties, 100; of extracts
from modern authors, 112; from Old
English, 112; of indefinite article before
h, u, etc., 114; of metric symbols, HI;
of names of months, 102; of names of
publications, 105; of names of regi-
ments, 100; of numbers commencing
a sentence, 96; of numbers of less than
three digits, 94; of possessives of proper
names ending in a sibilant, 113; of
"Railroad" and "Railway," 104; of
round numbers, 95; of "Saint," 108;
of sessions of Congress, 100; of states
and territories, 106; of sums of money,
97; of time of day, 98; of titles, 92;
of "United States," 103; of words
denoting subsections, in literary refer-
ences, no; rules for, 92-120.

Squares, capitalization of names of, 8.

"St.," indexing of names with, 2400.

Standard: of measurement in typography,
252; space used to separate words, 261.

Stars, names of, how treated, 71.

MANUAL OF STYLE: INDEX

297

"State," when capitalized, 28, note.

States and territories: list of abbrevia-
tions for, 1 06; to be abbreviated when
following those of towns, 106; names of
groups of, when capitalized, 5.

Statistics, treatment of numbers in, 94.

"Store," compounds of, 188.

Stub: brace, when used in, 244; definition
of, 242; head for, 242; leaders, when
used in, 244.

Styles of type, 253-57.

"Sub," compounds with, 208.

Subdivisions: in literary references, use
of lower case for, 54 (cf. no, 237);
letters used to indicate, to be set in
italics, 66; use of parentheses in con-
nection with, 66; of publications, capi-
talization of principal words in titles of,
41; titles of, to be roman-quoted, or
capitalized without quotation marks, 82.

Suffix or prefix, indicated by hyphen, 212.

Summarizing clauses, use of dashes in
connection with, 170.

"Super," compounds with, 208.

Superior figures, use of, for reference
indexes, 232, 234; for number of edi-
tion, 237 (n. 6).

Superscriptions, omission of period after,
125-

"Supra," compounds with, 208.

Supreme Being, capitalization of names
for, and pronouns referring to, 24.

Syllabi, scheme of notation and inden-
tion of subdivisions in, 176.

Syllables, hyphen used to indicate, 213.

Symbols: chemical, treatment of, 71, 123;
metric, spacing of, 269; treatment of,
in, 123; monetary, spacing of, 270;
of measurement, abbreviation of, in;
as reference indexes, 232.

Tables: blanks in, 245 (but see 230, open
tables); columns representing totals,
percentages, etc., frequently set off by
different type, 241; continued, 247,
248, 250; footnotes to, 232, 234, 249;
headlines of. how to set, 249; of two
columns, to be set as open, 248; of more
than two, as pled, 248; open, headlines
for columns in, 242; open, how to set,
241; ruled, box-heads for, 242; ruled,
how to set, 241 ; rules for setting of, 241-
50; rules for use of rules in, 243, 247;
specimen, 250; use of braces in, 244
(and see specimen tables, 250); use of
leaders in, 244, 245 (and open tables,
250).

Tabular work, rules for, 241-50 (see
Tables).

Technical: terms, explanation of typo-
graphical, 251-94; words or phrases,
use of quotation marks for, 77.

"The" not to be treated as part of title of
newspapers or magazines, 43.

Thick space, defined, 261.

Thin space, defined, 261.

Thin-spacing, where to avoid, 265.

Thoroughfares: capitalization of names
of, 8; numbers forming part of names
of, to be spelled out, 100.

Thousands, use of comma after digits
indicating, 159.

Three-em dash: defined, 261; illustrated,
261.

Three-em quad, defined, 261.

Three-em space, defined, 261.

Time: indications, how to punctuate, 134;
of day, how to treat, 98; do not divide
over line, 219.

Titles: academic, to be abbreviated, 22;
civil and military, capitalization of, 21;
honorary, 21; in direct address, 21; of
nobility, 21; preceding names, to be
spelled out, 92; list of exceptions, 92;
"vice," "ex-," "elect." and "general,"
constituting parts of, how to treat, 201.

Titles of legal causes and proceedings,
italicized, 63.

Titles of publications: capitalization of
principal words in s 41; use of capitals
in: English, Latin, French, Italian,
Spanish, Scandinavian, German, Dan-
ish, Dutch, 42; use of italics for, 60;
of roman-quoted, 80, 81, 82; to be
correctly quoted, 112; when to be
spelled out, 105; of addresses, 82; of
articles, 82; of books, 60; of chapters
82; of cycles of poems, 60; of divisions
of books, etc., 82; of documents, 60;
of essays, 60; of lectures, 82: of news-
papers, 60; of pamphlets, 60; of papers,
82; of periodicals, 60; of plays, 60;
of poems, printed in separate volume, 60;
of poems, short, 81 (cf. 60); of proceed-
ings of societies, 60; of series, 8p; of
tracts, 60; of transactions of societies,
60; of treatises, 60.

To, use dash in place of word, 158, 173.

Toasts, titles of: capitalization of prin-
cipal words in, 41; to be roman-quoted,
82.

"To be continued," at end of articles, how
to set, 73, 179.

298 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

"Today," "tonight," "tomorrow," hy-
phen to be omitted with, no, 204, note.

Totals, columns of, in tables, sometimes
in distinctive type, 241.

Town and state, names of, in date line,
how to set, 50.

Tracts, titles of: capitalization of prin-
cipal words in, 41 ; to be italicized, 60.

Transactions (of societies), titles of: capi-
talization of principal words in, 41;
to be italicized, 60.

Transition, use of dash to indicate, 166.

Translation of foreign words or phrases,
quoted, 78.

Treaties, capitalization of names of, 18.

Treatises, titles of: capitalization of prin-
cipal words in, 41; to be italicized, 60.

"Tri-," compounds with, 197.

Tribes, races, and peoples, capitalization
of names and epithets of, 47.

Trinity, Christian, capitalization of names
of members of, 24.

Two-column tables, to be set as open>
248.

Two-em dash: defined, 261; illustrated,
261.

Two-em quad, defined, 261.

Two-letter syllables, avoidance of, in
divisions, 216.

Type: different parts of body of, ex-
plained, 256; names for different sizes
of, 252; styles of, 253-57.

Typesetting machines, 293-94.

Typographical terms, explanation of,
251-94.

U, long, form of indefinite article before,
114.

"Ultra," compounds with, 209.

Umlaut, indexing of names beginning with,
Mot,

"Un-," compounds with, 205.

"Under," compounds with, 207.

Unit, typographical, explained, 251; on
monotype machine, 259.

Units of measurement, abbreviations for,
in; spelled with lower-case initial let-
ter, 55.

"United States": when to be spelled out,
103; when to be abbreviated, 103.

University of Chicago: capitalization of
special terms dealing with organization,
administration, and curricula of, 49;
of titles of divisions, departments, offi-
cers, and courses and units of study, in
official work dealing with, 49.

Unusual word or phrase, use of quotation
marks for, 77.

"Van," rule for treatment of, 3, 24oc.

Verbs: capitalization of, in titles of pub-
lications, 41; derived from proper
names, how to treat, 53.

Verse or page, letter affixed to number of,
to denote fractional part: to be set in
italic, 66; spacing of (see example), 66.

Versions of Bible: abbreviations for, 109;

capitalization of, 30.
Verso, defined, 283.
Versus (v., vs.), 59 (word-list), 61.
"Vice," prefixed to titles, how to treat, 201.
Vocative, "O," 117.
"Vol," "chap.," "p.," etc., in literary

references: use of numerals with, 237;

when omitted, 237; when spelled out,

237-

"Von," rule for treatment of, 3, 2406.
Vowel: divide on, whenever possible, 224;

single, forming separate syllable in

middle of word, to be put in first line

in dividing, 224.

Weights and measures, metric: how to
designate, 94, in; punctuation in, 159
spacing of, 269.

"Whereas," in resolutions, use of cap and
small caps for, 51.

Wide spacing, where to avoid, 265.

Word or phrase: accompanied by its defi-
nition, to be quoted, 76; to which
attention is directed, use of quotation
marks for, 79.

Words: common, from proper names with
a specialized meaning, lower case, 53;
hyphenated, list of, 214; of more than
one spelling, how to spell, 119.

"Work," compounds of, 186.

Works of art, titles of, to be roman-quoted,

84.
"World," compounds of, 192.

Zoological terms; use of capitals in, 46;
of italics, 71.

INDEX TO TYPES, ETC.

[The numbers in this index refer to pages]

Advertising figures, 231.
Antique Greek, 181.
Arabic, 182.

Black Gothic, 233.

Body Type (for hand composition):
Modern: five point No. sixty -seven, 137;
five point No. five hundred twenty-
seven, 137; six point No. fifty-seven,
138; seven point No. fifty-seven, 139;
eight point No. fifty-seven, 140; nine
point No. fifty-seven, 141; eleven
point No. sixty-five, 142; six point
Scotch Roman, 170; eight point Scotch
Roman, 171; ten point Scotch Roman,
172; eleven point Scotch Roman, 173;
twelve point Scotch Roman, 174;
fourteen point Scotch Roman, 175
Old Style: five point No. eight, 143;
fourteen point No. eight, 144; eighteen
point No. eight, 145; eight point Caslon,
166; ten point Caslon, 167; twelve
point Caslon, 168; fourteen point
Caslon, 169; six point Bookman, 176;
eight point Bookman, 177; ten point
Bookman, 178; twelve point Bookman,
179-

Bold-Face Italic, 229.

Bookman: on six-, eight-, ten-, and
twelve-point body, 176-79.

Borders, 270-81.

Bradley Text, 241.

Brass Circles, 261.

Brass Rule Faces, 278.

Canceled letters and figures, 183.

Caslon Old Style: monotype, 165;
foundry type, 186, 187.

Century Expanded, 216.

Chaucer Text, 243.

Coat-of-Arms, University of Chicago, 260.

Cheltenham: Bold, 203-5; Bold Con-
densed, 201-2, 205-7; Bold Extra
Condensed, 109-200; Bold Extended,
209; Bold Italic, 210-211; Condensed,
198; Old Style, 194; Old Style Italic,
194-95; Wide, 196-97.

Clarendon, 212.

Cloister Black, 223.
Condensed Title, 239.
Copperplate, 233.

Gushing: foundry type, 215; modern
figures with, 164; monotype, 158-64.

Delia Robbia, 213-14.
DeVinne, 224-27.
DeVinne Condensed, 228-29.
Elzevir Italic, 189.
Engraver's Bold, 237.
Engraver's Old English, 245.
thiopic, 182.

othic: Black, 233; Condensed, 232;
Interchangeable, 236; Lining Con-
densed, 234-35; Lightface, 232; Title,
212.

Gothic Condensed, 232.

Gothic Title, 212.

Goudy: Old Style, 217-18; Old Style

Italic, 218-19; Bold, 220-21.
Greek: Porson, 180; Antique, 181.

Hebrew, i8t.

Inferior letters and figures, monotype, 185.

Initials: Burford, 249-51; Caxton, 248;
Delia Robbia, 251-54; Jenson, 256;
Miscellaneous, 248, 256-59; Roycroft,
254-55.

Inscription Greek, 181.

Interchangeable Gothic, 236.

Ionic, 212.

Italic: Bold-Face, 229; Caslon Old Style,
187; Cheltenham Bold, 210-11; Chel-
tenham Old Style, 194-95; Elzevir,
189; Goudy Old Style, 218-19; Jenson
Old Style, 229; K, No. twenty-five, 165;
Old Style No. eight, 189; Scotch Roman,
170-75; also see body types.

Jenson, Old Style Italic, tag.

Lightface Gothic, 232.

Lining Gothic Condensed, 234-35.

Litho Roman, 238.

299

300 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

Macfarland, 239.

Miscellaneous Signs: foundry type, 183;

monotype, 184.
Monarch, 235.

Monotype: Modern: six point No. one
138; six point No. five, 153; seven
point No. eight, 154; eight point No.
eight, 155; nine point No. eight, 136;
eleven point No. eight, 157; Gushing
figures No. twenty-five, 164; ten point
Scotch Roman No. thirty-six, 165;
twelve point Caslon No. three hundred
thirty-seven, 165; eight point italic
No. twenty-five K, 165; ten point
italic No. twenty-five K. 165; twelve
point italic No. twenty-five K, 165;
eleven point Person Greek (also on
ten-point _body), 180; miscellaneous
signs, on six-, seven-, eight-, nine-, ten-,
eleven-, and twelve-point body, 184;
superior letters and figures (Old Style
and Modern on six-, seven-, eight-,
nine-, ten-, and eleven-point body), 185;
inferior letters and figures (Old Style
on six-, seven-, eight-, nine-, ten-, and
eleven-point body and Modern on
ten-point body), 185. Old Style: six
point No. thirty-one, 146; seven point
No. thirty-one, 147; eight point No.
thirty-one, 148; nine point No. thirty-
one, 149; ten point No. thirty-one, 150;
eleven point No. thirty-one, 151;
twelve point No. thirty -one, 152; six
point Gushing No. twenty-five, 158;
seven point Gushing No. twenty-five,
ISO! eight point Gushing No. twenty-
five, 160; nine point Gushing No.
twenty-five, 161; ten point No. twenty-
five, 162; eleven point No. twenty-five,
163; twelve point No. twenty-five
(eleven-point face, and accents with
twelve-point face), 164.

Nestorian Syriac, 182

New Model Elite Typewriter, 240.,

Old Style: No. eight, 143-43 (body type),
188; No. eight Italic, 189; Condensed,
190-91; Extended, 191-92; French,
192-^93; Cheltenham, 194; Cheltenham
Italic, 194-93; monotype, 146-32;
Goudy Old Style, 217-18; Jenson Italic,
229.

Ornaments, 262-77, 282.

Packard, 222-23.
Paul Revere, 239.
Porson Greek, 180.
Prescription Signs, 278.
Priory Text, 242 .

Remington Typewriter, 240.
Reproducing Typewriter, 240.

Scotch Roman: body type (foundry), 170-

73; (monotype), 163; job type, 230-31.
Script: Tiffany, 246; Tiffany Shaded,

247; Tiffany Upright, 246-47.
Special characters: foundry type, 183;

monotype, 184.
Superior letters and figures, monotype,

183.
Syriac, Nestorian, 182.

Text: Bradley, 241; Chaucer, 243;
Priory, 242; Wedding, 244; Engraver's
Old English, 243; English, 242.

Tiffany Script, 246.

Tiffany Shaded, 247.

Tiffany Upright, 246-47.

Title Condensed, 239.

Title Gothic, 212.

Tudor Black, 241.

Typewriter: New Model Elite Reming-
ton, 240; New Model Remington, 240;
Remington, 240; Reproducing, 240.

Wedding Text, 244.
Whittier, 233.

PRINTED IN THE U.S.A.

University of California

SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY

405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388

Return this material to the library

from which it was borrowed.

PAS - QL

OCT 5 1992

THE LIBRARY

UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA
LOS ANGELES

3 1158 00701 8004

A 000 467272

Unii